diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs')
132 files changed, 27088 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f15db16c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he.po @@ -0,0 +1,710 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Boot ISO Help package. +# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Yuri Chornoivan <yurchor@ukr.net>, 2019 +# Yaron Shahrabani <sh.yaron@gmail.com>, 2020 +# Omer I.S., 2020 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia Boot ISO Help 6.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-01-18 19:11+0200\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2017-04-04 18:35+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Omer I.S., 2020\n" +"Language-Team: Hebrew (https://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/teams/9361/" +"he/)\n" +"Language: he\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n == 1 && n % 1 == 0) ? 0 : (n == 2 && n % " +"1 == 0) ? 1: (n % 10 == 0 && n % 1 == 0 && n > 10) ? 2 : 3;\n" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <book> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:10 +msgid "en" +msgstr "he" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:12 en/NetInstall.xml:11 +msgid "Mageia NetInstall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:14 +msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" +msgstr "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:20 +msgid "May 2018" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:22 +msgid "Mageia 7" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:27 +msgid "The tool to install Mageia with remote repositories" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:32 +msgid "../mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:36 en/NetInstall.xml:22 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:40 en/NetInstall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</" +"link> שפותחה על ידי <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:44 en/NetInstall.xml:30 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link " +"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation " +"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><article><title> +#: en/NetInstall-cover.xml:52 +msgid "Installing Mageia using a Tiny Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:11 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "מבוא" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:14 +msgid "NetInstall Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:17 +msgid "Description" +msgstr "תיאור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:19 +msgid "These minimal ISO's contain:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:23 +msgid "" +"less than 100 MB and are convenient if bandwidth is too low to download a " +"full DVD, or if you have a PC without a DVD drive or unable to boot from a " +"USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:29 +msgid "" +"no more than that which is needed to a) start the <literal>DrakX</literal> " +"installer and b) find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other " +"packages that are needed to continue and complete the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The required source packages may be on a PC hard disk, a local drive, a " +"local network or on the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:40 +msgid "Installation via encrypted wifi or bluetooth is not supported." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:46 +msgid "Availability" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:48 +msgid "There a two versions of the NetInstall media:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:52 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">netinstall.iso</emphasis> For those who prefer not " +"to use non-free software, this ISO contains only free software." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:58 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">netinstall-nonfree.iso</emphasis> This ISO " +"additionally includes proprietary device drivers, which may be required for " +"your network device, disk controller, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Both versions are available in the form of separate 32-bit and 64-bit ISO's. " +"See here: <link xlink:href=\"https://www.mageia.org/downloads/\">https://www." +"mageia.org/downloads/</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:70 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:72 +msgid "" +"After downloading the image, burn it to a CD/DVD or, if you prefer to put it " +"on a USB stick, follow the instructions here: <link xlink:href=\"https://" +"wiki.mageia.org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick" +"\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:79 +msgid "Installation Stages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:81 +msgid "The installation is carried out in two stages:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 1</emphasis> This is the pre-Installation " +"stage. You will need to provide the method and details for accessing the " +"medium containing the files to be used for the installation. If the method " +"involves a server, then the network connection will be activated." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:93 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 2</emphasis> This is the actual Installation " +"stage, which will automatically commence once a connection to the installer " +"files has been established." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:100 +msgid "" +"During Stage 1, nothing will be written to your Hard Disk, so it is safe to " +"quit at any point during Stage 1 if you wish. You can do so by pressing " +"<keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </" +"keycombo>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:112 +msgid "" +"You can use <keycombo> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F3</keycap> </keycombo> " +"to read the logs and <keycombo> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F1</keycap> </" +"keycombo> to return to the installer screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><warning><para> +#: en/netInstall-intro.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Unlike when installing from DVD or LiveCD, during the first part of the " +"installation (<emphasis role=\"bold\">Stage 1</emphasis>), you will be asked " +"to type things. During this stage, your keyboard will operate as per an " +"<link xlink:href=\"https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/" +"Keyboard_layout#United_States\">American keyboard</link> layout. This can be " +"very confusing when you need to type names and paths." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:15 +msgid "Stage 1 (Pre-installation Stage)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:18 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "אתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:20 +msgid "" +"The particular <emphasis>Welcome Screen</emphasis> that you will see when " +"booting with the NetInstall media depends on whether you are booting on a " +"BIOS or UEFI system. See the following two screenshots:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:25 +msgid "BIOS Welcome Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:29 +msgid "../dx-help.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:27 en/netInstall-stage1.xml:42 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:34 +msgid "" +"When booting up, you can choose to read the advanced help by pressing " +"<keycap>F2</keycap> and return to the installer screen by pressing " +"<keycap>F1</keycap>. Otherwise, the boot will continue with default settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:40 +msgid "UEFI Welcome Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:44 +msgid "../net-welcome2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Use the arrow keys to highlight <emphasis>Start Mageia Install</emphasis> " +"and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:56 +msgid "" +"For both BIOS and UEFI systems, you will then see a pop-up notification " +"saying that USB devices are being detected:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:61 +msgid "../netInstall-01.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:67 +msgid "Installation Method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:69 +msgid "" +"You can now choose an installation method via CDROM/HDD or Server (NFS, FTP " +"or HTTP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:72 +msgid "You also have the option to load third-party modules at this point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:77 +msgid "../netInstall-02.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Move up or down the list using the arrow keys until the appropriate method " +"of installation is highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:88 +msgid "" +"Press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key until <emphasis>Ok</emphasis> is " +"highlighted and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:94 +msgid "Server" +msgstr "שרת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:98 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose for a Network Installation, choose " +"<emphasis>FTP server</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:103 +msgid "" +"On an enterprise network, FTP and rsync may be blocked, so using " +"<emphasis>HTTP server</emphasis> is a good choice in this case." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:109 +msgid "" +"After choosing any of the server options you will automatically proceed to " +"the <emphasis><xref linkend=\"netConn\"/></emphasis> section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:115 +msgid "CDROM/HDD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you choose to install from either a CDROM or hard disk (or USB stick), a " +"scan for storage devices will be performed:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:122 +msgid "../netInstall-03.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:128 +msgid "First, select the relevant hard drive (or USB stick)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:134 +msgid "../netInstall-04.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:140 +msgid "Followed by the relevant partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:146 +msgid "../netInstall-05.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:152 +msgid "Then specify the directory or the file name of the ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:156 +msgid "" +"Leaving this open, or using the directory is easier, because the installer " +"then presents you with a list of directories and files from which you can " +"make your selection using the up and down arrows, as seen in the second of " +"the following images." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:163 +msgid "../netInstall-06.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:169 +msgid "../netInstall-07.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:173 +msgid "" +"Once the information has been provided for the location of the ISO, either " +"on CDROM or HDD, you will automatically proceed to <emphasis><xref linkend=" +"\"netStageTwo\"/></emphasis> (the actual installation stage)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:180 +msgid "Load Third-Party Modules" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:182 +msgid "" +"If you wish to <emphasis>Load third-party modules</emphasis>, then you will " +"be asked for the location of the directory containing the modules:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:188 +msgid "../netInstall-08.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:195 +msgid "Network Connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:198 +msgid "Connection Device" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:200 +msgid "" +"If you chose any of the server options at the <emphasis>Installation Method</" +"emphasis> step, you will then be asked to choose a network device:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:206 +msgid "../netInstall-09.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:212 +msgid "Connection Type" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:214 +msgid "" +"Now you need to choose whether the network device will use a DHCP, Static or " +"ADSL connection:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:219 +msgid "../netInstall-10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:223 +msgid "" +"If you are unsure which option is suitable, then you should probably accept " +"the default option (DHCP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:228 +msgid "Host/Domain Names" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:230 +msgid "If necessary, you can now supply your Host and Domain names:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:235 +msgid "../netInstall-11.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:241 +msgid "" +"If you are unsure what this means then you can just leave the fields blank, " +"highlight <emphasis>Ok</emphasis> and press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to " +"proceed. The network connection will now be activated." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:248 +msgid "" +"If you are using either FTP or HTTP, you will automatically proceed to the " +"<emphasis><xref linkend=\"netMirrors\"/></emphasis> section" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:252 +msgid "" +"If you are using NFS, you will be asked for the NFS server name and the " +"directory containing the Mageia distribution:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:257 +msgid "../netInstall-12.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:261 +msgid "" +"After entering the NFS details, you will automatically proceed to " +"<emphasis><xref linkend=\"netStageTwo\"/></emphasis> (the actual " +"installation stage)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:268 +msgid "Mirrors" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:270 +msgid "" +"If using FTP or HTTP, you now have to specify a mirror to use. This can be " +"done manually or by choosing from a list" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:275 +msgid "../netInstall-13.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:280 +msgid "Specify Manually" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:282 +msgid "" +"You will find a list of all available mirrors here: <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://mirrors.mageia.org/\">http://mirrors.mageia.org/</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:285 +msgid "" +"Whichever mirror you choose, it should use the same tree-like structure from " +"\"mageia\" (or \"Mageia\") as used by the official Mageia mirrors. That " +"means .../mageia/distrib/<version>/<arch>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:290 +msgid "" +"A correct entry (when using an official mirror) in the <emphasis>Mageia " +"directory</emphasis> field below, could be:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:293 +msgid "<filename>pub/linux/mageia/distrib/cauldron/i586</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:295 +msgid "Another example (for Mageia 6 x86_64) could be:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:297 +msgid "<filename>pub/Mirrors/Mageia/distrib/6/x86_64</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:299 +msgid "" +"Other mirrors may have a different path structure and the screenshots below " +"show such examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:302 +msgid "If you are using an FTP server:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:306 +msgid "../netInstall-14.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:310 +msgid "If you are using an HTTP server:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:314 +msgid "../netInstall-15.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:318 en/netInstall-stage1.xml:344 +msgid "" +"Once this information has been provided, you will automatically proceed to " +"<emphasis><xref linkend=\"netStageTwo\"/></emphasis> (the actual " +"installation stage)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:324 +msgid "Select From a List" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:326 +msgid "" +"If you get a lot of missing dependency errors later in the install, reboot " +"and try a different mirror." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:331 +msgid "../netInstall-16.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:335 +msgid "" +"After choosing an FTP server, you will see a screen where you can optionally " +"add a login name and password if required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/netInstall-stage1.xml:340 +msgid "../netInstall-17.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/netInstall-stage2.xml:15 +msgid "Stage 2 (Installation Stage)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/netInstall-stage2.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Nothing has been written to your hard disk at this point. Therefore, if you " +"decide not to proceed with the actual installation, then it is safe to " +"reboot now: go to <literal>tty2</literal> with <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</" +"keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> and press " +"<keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> </" +"keycombo> (or <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> " +"<keycap>F7</keycap> </keycombo> to come back if you change your mind)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><subtitle> +#: en/NetInstall.xml:13 +msgid "Installing Mageia Using a Tiny Boot Image" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/NetInstall.xml:17 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..709bf445 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="NetInstall-cover"> + <info> + <title>Mageia NetInstall</title> + + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>May 2018</date> + + <revremark>Mageia 7</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The tool to install Mageia with remote repositories</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <article> + <title>Installing Mageia using a Tiny Boot Image</title> + + <xi:include href="netInstall-intro.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="netInstall-stage1.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="netInstall-stage2.xml"/> + </article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf6d6493 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/NetInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<article version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<!-- 2018/??/?? apb: a) Bit of a re-word/format. + b) Disabled the XInclude for bootIso.xml, and included its contents directly within this NetInstall.xml instead. It does not seem practical to have NetInstall.xml acting as the header for + just bootIso.xml. As it was, there were basically two competing titles (one for NetInstall and one for bootIso), and this also resulted in an unnecessary extra nest level for bootIso sections. + c) I have also (via xi:include) bolted on the Classical Installer XML's (starting from Please Choose a Language) to Stage 2. This seems better than just pointing people to the documentation. + d) Update some PNG's to Mga6 and center-align all PNG's. Added a PNG each for NFS and 3rd-party. Uploaded a renamed set of PNG's (from Boot/boot-iso/imgx/x.png to netInstall-xx.png) and using those instead. + e) Made a couple of web-link pointers verbose (instead of see "here"). --> +<!-- <xi:include href="bootIso.xml"/> + --> +<!-- 2018/05/18 apb: Split the body into 3 parts: netInstall-intro.xml, netInstall-stage1.xml and netInstall-stage2.xml --> +<info> + <title>Mageia NetInstall</title> + + <subtitle>Installing Mageia Using a Tiny Boot Image</subtitle> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <xi:include href="netInstall-intro.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="netInstall-stage1.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="netInstall-stage2.xml"/> +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e23d59ff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <!-- 2018/05/18 apb: Created this xml, along with netInstall-stage1.xml and netInstall-stage2.xml to replace the previously single xml for NetInstall. --> +<title>מבוא</title> + + <section> + <title>NetInstall Media</title> + + <section> + <title>תיאור</title> + + <para>These minimal ISO's contain:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>less than 100 MB and are convenient if bandwidth is too low to download a +full DVD, or if you have a PC without a DVD drive or unable to boot from a +USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>no more than that which is needed to a) start the <literal>DrakX</literal> +installer and b) find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other +packages that are needed to continue and complete the install.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The required source packages may be on a PC hard disk, a local drive, a +local network or on the Internet.</para> + + <note> + <para>Installation via encrypted wifi or bluetooth is not supported.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Availability</title> + + <para>There a two versions of the NetInstall media:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">netinstall.iso</emphasis> For those who prefer not to +use non-free software, this ISO contains only free software.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">netinstall-nonfree.iso</emphasis> This ISO +additionally includes proprietary device drivers, which may be required for +your network device, disk controller, etc.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Both versions are available in the form of separate 32-bit and 64-bit +ISO's. See here: <link +xlink:href="https://www.mageia.org/downloads/">https://www.mageia.org/downloads/</link></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Preparation</title> + + <para>After downloading the image, burn it to a CD/DVD or, if you prefer to put it +on a USB stick, follow the instructions here: <link +xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Installation_Media#Dump_Mageia_ISOs_on_an_USB_stick</link></para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Installation Stages</title> + + <para>The installation is carried out in two stages:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Stage 1</emphasis> This is the pre-Installation +stage. You will need to provide the method and details for accessing the +medium containing the files to be used for the installation. If the method +involves a server, then the network connection will be activated.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Stage 2</emphasis> This is the actual Installation +stage, which will automatically commence once a connection to the installer +files has been established.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>During Stage 1, nothing will be written to your Hard Disk, so it is safe to +quit at any point during Stage 1 if you wish. You can do so by pressing +<keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Del</keycap> +</keycombo>.</para> + </note> + + <tip> + <para>You can use <keycombo> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F3</keycap> </keycombo> +to read the logs and <keycombo> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F1</keycap> +</keycombo> to return to the installer screen.</para> + </tip> + + <warning> + <para>Unlike when installing from DVD or LiveCD, during the first part of the +installation (<emphasis role="bold">Stage 1</emphasis>), you will be asked +to type things. During this stage, your keyboard will operate as per an +<link +xlink:href="https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout#United_States">American +keyboard</link> layout. This can be very confusing when you need to type +names and paths.</para> + </warning> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6b925c18 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage1.xml @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + <!-- 2018/05/18 apb: Created this xml, along with netInstall-intro.xml and netInstall-stage2.xml to replace the previously single xml for NetInstall. --> +<!-- 2019/01/06 apb: typo 2.2.2) --> +<!-- 2019/01/08 apb: Update UEFI SC (had to rename to net-welcome2, because the previous was shared with SC in Classical installer - however, the SC's are no longer the same. --> +<title>Stage 1 (Pre-installation Stage)</title> + + <section> + <title>אתחול</title> + + <para>The particular <emphasis>Welcome Screen</emphasis> that you will see when +booting with the NetInstall media depends on whether you are booting on a +BIOS or UEFI system. See the following two screenshots:</para> + + <figure> + <title>BIOS Welcome Screen</title> + +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../dx-help.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></figure> + + <para>When booting up, you can choose to read the advanced help by pressing +<keycap>F2</keycap> and return to the installer screen by pressing +<keycap>F1</keycap>. Otherwise, the boot will continue with default +settings.</para> + + <figure> + <title>UEFI Welcome Screen</title> + +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../net-welcome2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></figure> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Use the arrow keys to highlight <emphasis>Start Mageia Install</emphasis> +and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>For both BIOS and UEFI systems, you will then see a pop-up notification +saying that USB devices are being detected:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-01.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xreflabel="Installation Method" xml:id="installMethod"> + <title>Installation Method</title> + + <para>You can now choose an installation method via CDROM/HDD or Server (NFS, FTP +or HTTP).</para> + + <para>You also have the option to load third-party modules at this point.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-02.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Move up or down the list using the arrow keys until the appropriate method +of installation is highlighted.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key until <emphasis>Ok</emphasis> is +highlighted and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <section> + <title>שרת</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If you don't know what to choose for a Network Installation, choose +<emphasis>FTP server</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>On an enterprise network, FTP and rsync may be blocked, so using +<emphasis>HTTP server</emphasis> is a good choice in this case.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>After choosing any of the server options you will automatically proceed to +the <emphasis><xref linkend="netConn"/></emphasis> section.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>CDROM/HDD</title> + + <para>If you choose to install from either a CDROM or hard disk (or USB stick), a +scan for storage devices will be performed:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-03.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>First, select the relevant hard drive (or USB stick)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-04.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Followed by the relevant partition</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-05.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Then specify the directory or the file name of the ISO</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Leaving this open, or using the directory is easier, because the installer +then presents you with a list of directories and files from which you can +make your selection using the up and down arrows, as seen in the second of +the following images.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-06.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-07.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once the information has been provided for the location of the ISO, either +on CDROM or HDD, you will automatically proceed to <emphasis><xref +linkend="netStageTwo"/></emphasis> (the actual installation stage).</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Load Third-Party Modules</title> + + <para>If you wish to <emphasis>Load third-party modules</emphasis>, then you will +be asked for the location of the directory containing the modules:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-08.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + </section> + + <section xreflabel="Network Connection" xml:id="netConn"> + <title>Network Connection</title> + + <section> + <title>Connection Device</title> + + <para>If you chose any of the server options at the <emphasis>Installation +Method</emphasis> step, you will then be asked to choose a network device:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-09.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Connection Type</title> + + <para>Now you need to choose whether the network device will use a DHCP, Static or +ADSL connection:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-10.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you are unsure which option is suitable, then you should probably accept +the default option (DHCP).</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Host/Domain Names</title> + + <para>If necessary, you can now supply your Host and Domain names:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-11.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If you are unsure what this means then you can just leave the fields blank, +highlight <emphasis>Ok</emphasis> and press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to +proceed. The network connection will now be activated.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you are using either FTP or HTTP, you will automatically proceed to the +<emphasis><xref linkend="netMirrors"/></emphasis> section</para> + + <para>If you are using NFS, you will be asked for the NFS server name and the +directory containing the Mageia distribution:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-12.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After entering the NFS details, you will automatically proceed to +<emphasis><xref linkend="netStageTwo"/></emphasis> (the actual installation +stage).</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section xreflabel="Mirrors" xml:id="netMirrors"> + <title>Mirrors</title> + + <para>If using FTP or HTTP, you now have to specify a mirror to use. This can be +done manually or by choosing from a list</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-13.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Specify Manually</title> + + <para>You will find a list of all available mirrors here: <link +xlink:href="http://mirrors.mageia.org/">http://mirrors.mageia.org/</link></para> + + <para>Whichever mirror you choose, it should use the same tree-like structure from +"mageia" (or "Mageia") as used by the official Mageia mirrors. That means +.../mageia/distrib/<version>/<arch></para> + + <para>A correct entry (when using an official mirror) in the <emphasis>Mageia +directory</emphasis> field below, could be:</para> + + <para><filename>pub/linux/mageia/distrib/cauldron/i586</filename></para> + + <para>Another example (for Mageia 6 x86_64) could be:</para> + + <para><filename>pub/Mirrors/Mageia/distrib/6/x86_64</filename></para> + + <para>Other mirrors may have a different path structure and the screenshots below +show such examples:</para> + + <para>If you are using an FTP server:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-14.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you are using an HTTP server:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-15.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once this information has been provided, you will automatically proceed to +<emphasis><xref linkend="netStageTwo"/></emphasis> (the actual installation +stage).</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Select From a List</title> + + <para>If you get a lot of missing dependency errors later in the install, reboot +and try a different mirror.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-16.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing an FTP server, you will see a screen where you can optionally +add a login name and password if required.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="../netInstall-17.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once this information has been provided, you will automatically proceed to +<emphasis><xref linkend="netStageTwo"/></emphasis> (the actual installation +stage).</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54d9e6f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/bootiso/he/netInstall-stage2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xreflabel="Stage 2" xml:id="netStageTwo" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns6="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <!-- 2018/05/18 apb: Created this xml, along with netInstall-intro.xml and netInstall-stage1.xml to replace the previously single xml for NetInstall. --> +<!-- 2019/01/17 apb: Changed xi:include for the 3 configureX xml's -> graphicalConfiguration.xml --> +<title>Stage 2 (Installation Stage)</title> + + <para>Nothing has been written to your hard disk at this point. Therefore, if you +decide not to proceed with the actual installation, then it is safe to +reboot now: go to <literal>tty2</literal> with <keycombo> +<keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> +and press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> +<keycap>Del</keycap> </keycombo> (or <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F7</keycap> </keycombo> to come back if you +change your mind).</para> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="software.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="locale.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3917f1b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he.po @@ -0,0 +1,4425 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package. +# +# Translators: +# Omer I.S., 2020 +# Yaron Shahrabani <sh.yaron@gmail.com>, 2020 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2020-06-29 21:35+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-11-06 09:06+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Omer I.S.\n" +"Language-Team: Hebrew (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/language/" +"he/)\n" +"Language: he\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n == 1 && n % 1 == 0) ? 0 : (n == 2 && n % " +"1 == 0) ? 1: (n % 10 == 0 && n % 1 == 0 && n > 10) ? 2 : 3;\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:31 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "רישיון והערות שחרור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:46 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "הסכם רישיון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions " +"carefully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:56 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must " +"be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:61 +msgid "" +"To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on " +"<emphasis>Next</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:66 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your " +"interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your " +"computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:76 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "הערות שחרור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by " +"clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:3 +msgid "Supplemental Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy. +#. 2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source. " +"The source selection determines which packages will be available during the " +"subsequent steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:28 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:32 +msgid "Choosing and activating the network, if not already up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Tainted</" +"emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, " +"you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit " +"packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by " +"selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only " +"contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be " +"able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, " +"the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:9 +msgid "User Management" +msgstr "ניהול משתמשים" + +#. Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask) +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography. +#. 2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6. +#. 2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management). +#. Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'. +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style. +#. 2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png. +#. 2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata fileref=\"live-user1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:40 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:44 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a <literal>superuser</" +"literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the <emphasis>root </" +"emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:51 +msgid "" +"As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from red-to-" +"yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green shield " +"shows you are using a strong password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:55 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:63 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "הזנת פרטי משתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the " +"<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office " +"applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a " +"computer for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Icon</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">סמל</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:75 +msgid "Click on this button if you want to change the user's icon" +msgstr "יש ללחוץ על סמל זה אם ברצונך לשנות את סמל המשתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:80 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Real Name</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">השם האמיתי</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:82 +msgid "Insert the user's real name into this text box" +msgstr "יש להזין את השם האמתי של המשתמש בתיבת טקסט זו" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:86 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:88 +msgid "" +"Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real " +"name. <emphasis role=\"bold\">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><caution><simpara> +#: en/addUser.xml:93 +msgid "" +"The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for " +"your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be " +"written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as " +"Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:102 en/setupBootloader.xml:135 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">סיסמה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:104 +msgid "Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user " +"password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is " +"both read and write protected (umask=0027)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:117 +msgid "" +"You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</" +"emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:121 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:128 +msgid "User Management (advanced)" +msgstr "ניהול משתמשים (מתקדם)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:131 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings " +"for the user you are adding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:136 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the " +"shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are " +"<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you " +"added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, " +"then leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:149 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if " +"unsure, leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:10 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "בחירת נקודות עיגון" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points " +"yourself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55 +msgid "" +"To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For " +"example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and <filename>5</" +"filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed by " +"the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:63 +msgid "" +"If you have several partitions, you can choose various different " +"<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as " +"<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and <filename>/var</" +"filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for instance <filename>/" +"video</filename> for a partition where you want to store your films, or " +"perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:73 +msgid "" +"For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the " +"mount point field blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename> " +"(root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to " +"go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where " +"you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:90 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <emphasis>Next</" +"emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition " +"suggested by DrakX, or more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bestTime.xml:5 +msgid "Clock Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/bestTime.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"bestTime.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local " +"time or UTC time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time " +"synchronization and specify an NTP server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:10 +msgid "Boot Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:14 +msgid "Booting the medium" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug " +"the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:19 +msgid "" +"If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need " +"to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try " +"accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer " +"will boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:24 +msgid "" +"To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try " +"pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or <keycap>Esc</" +"keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>, <keycap>F8</keycap>, " +"<keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the boot device menu. These " +"(fairly common) keys are just a selection of possible options though." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media " +"will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or " +"UEFI type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:39 +msgid "In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\" align=\"center\"/> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:46 +msgid "First screen while booting in BIOS mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:50 en/bootLive.xml:104 en/installer.xml:108 +#: en/installer.xml:156 +msgid "Menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:52 en/bootLive.xml:106 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot Mageia</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB " +"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:56 +msgid "Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:60 en/bootLive.xml:72 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to boot)</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:62 +msgid "Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:68 en/bootLive.xml:112 en/installer.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install Mageia</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:69 en/bootLive.xml:113 +msgid "This option will install Mageia to a hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:74 +msgid "Install Mageia using non-free video drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:79 en/installer.xml:127 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Memory Test</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:80 en/installer.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write operations. " +"Reboot to end the test." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:84 en/bootLive.xml:116 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\"> F2 Language</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:85 en/bootLive.xml:117 +msgid "" +"Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language " +"during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then " +"press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:93 +msgid "In UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:100 +msgid "First screen while booting in UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:107 +msgid "" +"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB " +"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). Once the " +"boot is done, you can proceed to the installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:123 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options " +"duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will " +"be suffixed with \"USB\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:16 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "בחירת שולחן עבודה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:23 +msgid "Some choices made here will open other screens with related options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the " +"installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing " +"the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop " +"environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or, " +"actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software " +"choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is " +"lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer " +"packages installed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:3 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "בחירת קבוצת חבילות לפי נושא" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC +#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Workstation</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical Environment</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">סביבה גרפית</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use " +"this option to manually add or remove packages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:40 +msgid "" +"See <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"/> for instructions on how to do a " +"minimal install (without or with X & IceWM)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:3 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:21 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <emphasis>floppy</" +"emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages " +"(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the " +"same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install " +"and choosing to load it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The " +"settings DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:31 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:37 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" " +"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the " +"same timezone." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:32 +msgid "" +"In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time " +"or to GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:27 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:38 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:41 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 en/configureX_monitor.xml:78 +msgid "Vendor" +msgstr "יצרן" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:48 +msgid "then the make of your card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:52 +msgid "and the model of card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and " +"open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver " +"for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides " +"basic capabilities." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><caution><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in " +"some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The " +"<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after " +"your first reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:23 +msgid "Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:34 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user " +"interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply " +"<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other " +"graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings " +"need to be correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are " +"incorrect, or if none are shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphics Card</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable list. " +"See <xref linkend=\"configureX_card_list\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">צג</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:57 +msgid "" +"You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the " +"<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose " +"<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and " +"vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref linkend=" +"\"configureX_monitor\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:65 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">רזולוציה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:68 +msgid "The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">בדיקה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:76 +msgid "" +"The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is " +"there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your " +"settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings " +"will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration " +"screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is " +"satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your " +"settings are on the safe side." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:87 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">אפשרויות</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:90 +msgid "Here you can choose to enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:95 +msgid "" +"There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are " +"outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT " +"displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally " +"enter standby mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:29 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics " +"could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something " +"without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:50 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "התאמה אישית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:59 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:68 +msgid "Plug'n Play" +msgstr "הכנס-הפעל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:71 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor " +"type from the monitor database." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:81 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:90 +msgid "Manufacturer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:94 +msgid "Monitor model" +msgstr "דגם הצג" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:100 +msgid "Generic" +msgstr "כללי" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such " +"as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. " +"This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA " +"card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. " +"Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your selections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:24 +msgid "Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details " +"before you start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage " +"device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>, " +"<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it. " +"<emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label " +"(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click " +"<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:71 +msgid "" +"Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you " +"are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename> partition. " +"The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename> partition must NOT " +"be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System " +"Partition) is present and correctly mounted on <filename>/boot/EFI</" +"filename>. See Figure 1 below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot " +"partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:103 +msgid "EFI System Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:106 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:105 en/diskdrake.xml:119 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:117 +msgid "BIOS boot partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:120 en/doPartitionDisks.xml:206 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "he" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:4 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "חלוקה למחיצות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:31 +msgid "Suggested Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:34 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the " +"DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38 +msgid "" +"The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to " +"the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:43 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:53 +msgid "Main Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות ראשיות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:59 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:68 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia " +"installation but see the warning below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:82 +msgid "" +"With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in " +"light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their " +"intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by " +"clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following " +"screenshot:<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:97 +msgid "" +"This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is " +"a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important " +"files before proceeding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:103 +msgid "" +"The partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:112 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:115 +msgid "This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119 +msgid "" +"This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you " +"intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data " +"on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:127 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:130 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> " +"option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to " +"the following rules:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:142 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is " +"created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:148 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions " +"are created" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:153 +msgid "" +"6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename> " +"with a maximum of 50 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:158 +msgid "1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:163 +msgid "the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:170 +msgid "" +"This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will " +"create three partitions:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:175 +msgid "50 GB for <filename>/</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:179 +msgid "4 GB for <filename>swap</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:183 +msgid "and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:188 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be " +"automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted " +"on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</" +"emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly " +"done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:194 +msgid "" +"If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned " +"disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already exist. " +"It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with the " +"Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any " +"other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for " +"filesystem type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:201 +msgid "See <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/> for information on how to proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:216 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:226 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the " +"partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a " +"drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:231 +msgid "" +"Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a " +"device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an " +"alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following " +"settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:238 +msgid "<emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:242 +msgid "<emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:15 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:54 en/DrakLive.xml:18 +msgid "Installation from LIVE medium" +msgstr "התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:15 +msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" +msgstr "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:23 +msgid "March 2016" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:25 +msgid "Mageia 5" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:30 en/DrakX-cover.xml:28 +msgid "The Official Documentation for Mageia" +msgstr "התיעוד הרשמי עבור Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:33 en/DrakX-cover.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:38 en/DrakLive.xml:27 en/DrakX-cover.xml:36 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:12 en/DrakX.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:42 en/DrakLive.xml:31 en/DrakX-cover.xml:40 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:15 en/DrakX.xml:49 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</" +"link> שפותחה על ידי <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:46 en/DrakX-cover.xml:44 en/DrakX-inline.xml:17 +#: en/DrakX.xml:53 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:56 en/DrakLive.xml:21 en/DrakX-cover.xml:66 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:6 en/DrakX.xml:39 en/selectKeyboard.xml:49 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:57 en/DrakLive.xml:22 en/DrakX-cover.xml:67 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:7 en/DrakX.xml:40 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:60 en/DrakLive.xml:25 en/DrakX-cover.xml:70 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:10 en/DrakX.xml:43 en/selectKeyboard.xml:56 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link " +"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation " +"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:13 en/DrakX-cover.xml:64 en/DrakX-inline.xml:3 +#: en/DrakX.xml:36 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:21 +msgid "February 2014" +msgstr "פברואר 2014" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:23 +msgid "Mageia 4" +msgstr "Mageia 4" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:3 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "ברכות" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to " +"remove the installation medium and reboot your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:22 +msgid "" +"After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating " +"system to start (if there are more than one on your computer)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:30 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Visit <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/\">www.mageia.org/en/</link> " +"if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/firewall.xml:16 +msgid "Firewall" +msgstr "חומת אש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they " +"determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the " +"target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the " +"system to be accessible from the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/firewall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-firewall.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:31 +msgid "" +"In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is " +"accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no firewall)</" +"emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine - an option " +"that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since it would " +"create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the context of " +"the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for temporarily " +"disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and debugging " +"purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:40 +msgid "" +"All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will " +"enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible " +"from the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:44 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">מתקדם</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:46 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable " +"a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank " +"separated)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:50 +msgid "<emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:53 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned " +"to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as " +"defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:57 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> " +"or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the " +"service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:62 +msgid "" +"For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore " +"is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:65 +msgid "" +"In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 " +"couples for the same port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:10 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to " +"check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and " +"then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where " +"you can choose to view details of your partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:54 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selections, click on <emphasis>Next</" +"emphasis> to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/graphicalConfiguration.xml:13 +msgid "Graphical Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:34 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "DrakX, כלי ההתקנה של Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:42 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "צעדי ההתקנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:46 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which " +"is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens, which may also have <emphasis>Advanced</" +"emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details " +"about the particular step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para> +#: en/installer.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it " +"is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para> +#: en/installer.xml:70 +msgid "" +"If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a " +"text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> " +"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that, " +"press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Delete</" +"keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:88 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "מסך קבלת הפנים של ההתקנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:90 +msgid "" +"The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the " +"Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of " +"the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:94 +msgid "" +"The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will " +"start the installer, and is normally all that you will need." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:99 +msgid "Legacy (BIOS) Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will " +"automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:119 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue System</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:121 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing " +"Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:134 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: שפה</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:136 +msgid "Press F2 for alternative languages." +msgstr "יש ללחוץ על F2 להצגת שפות חלופיות." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:142 +msgid "UEFI Systems" +msgstr "מערכות UEFI" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:144 +msgid "" +"From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to " +"enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap> " +"to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:159 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:164 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either " +"re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use " +"it to restore a Windows bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:171 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language:</emphasis> Press <keycap>F2</keycap> " +"for alternative languages." +msgstr "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: שפה:</emphasis> יש ללחוץ על <keycap>F2</keycap> " +"להצגת שפות חלופיות." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:176 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, " +"and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with \"USB\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:183 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:186 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "אין ממשק גרפי" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:190 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language " +"Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and " +"older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command> " +"at the prompt." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use this press " +"<keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen and confirm " +"with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black screen with " +"a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command> and press " +"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:210 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware " +"detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined " +"with other parameters as necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:220 +msgid "RAM problem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:222 +msgid "" +"This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where " +"<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of RAM. e.g. " +"<literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:230 +msgid "Dynamic partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:232 +msgid "" +"If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to " +"<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not " +"possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a <literal>Basic</" +"literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link ns2:href=\"http://msdn." +"microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/" +"library/cc776315.aspx</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:25 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "עדכונים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" format=\"png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-installUpdates.png\" format=\"png" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been " +"updated or improved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:54 +msgid "Press <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue" +msgstr "יש ללחוץ על <emphasis>קדימה</emphasis> להמשך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/locale.xml:9 +msgid "Locale" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/login.xml:4 +msgid "Login Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/login.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/login.xml:11 +msgid "SDDM login screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:14 +msgid "Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:15 +msgid "" +"Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find " +"yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live " +"medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can find further documentation in <link xmlns:ns0=\"http://www.w3." +"org/1999/xlink\" ns0:href=\"../../installer/\">the Mageia wiki</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:10 +msgid "Available Media" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. 2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para. +#. 2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:44 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD's, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use " +"this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package selection</" +"emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref linkend=" +"\"choosePackagesTree\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting " +"everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see " +"<xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package " +"selection</emphasis> option in the same screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see " +"screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as " +"documentation and <quote>X</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a " +"lightweight desktop environment) will also be included." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and " +"<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link xlink:" +"href=\"http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html\">Linux Documentation Project</" +"link> and the <link xlink:href=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/" +"manual/\">GNU coreutils</link> info pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Configuration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography. +#. 2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles. +#. 2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:24 +msgid "" +"DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want by pressing <emphasis>Configure</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:30 +msgid "" +"As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings " +"unless:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:33 +msgid "there are known issues with a default setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:37 +msgid "the default setting has already been tried and it fails" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:41 +msgid "some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:49 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Timezone</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:56 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You " +"can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Country / Region</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the " +"setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:70 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:72 +msgid "DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more " +"information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">User management</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:85 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own " +"<filename>/home</filename> directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:91 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Services</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:93 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run in the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see " +"<xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Keyboard</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">מקלדת</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type " +"of keyboard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:118 +msgid "" +"If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind " +"that your passwords are going to change too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:124 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Mouse</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:131 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Sound card</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:133 +msgid "The installer will use the default driver if one is available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:136 en/soundConfig.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other " +"possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, " +"but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you " +"can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:144 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical interface</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:146 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For " +"more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:155 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:169 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:171 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control " +"Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:178 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:185 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Proxies</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:187 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:192 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters " +"you need to enter here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:201 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "הגדרות אבטחה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:206 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:208 +msgid "" +"The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting " +"(Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits " +"your usage." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:215 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Firewall</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:217 +msgid "" +"The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on " +"your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound " +"connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your " +"computer normally." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:223 +msgid "" +"Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are " +"continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly <quote>safe</" +"quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as covert data " +"channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:229 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>." +msgstr "למידע נוסף, נא לראות <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:232 +msgid "" +"Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may " +"be very risky." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/reboot.xml:3 +msgid "Reboot" +msgstr "הפעלה מחדש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/reboot.xml:7 +msgid "" +"Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your " +"computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:9 +msgid "" +"Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">same</emphasis> order." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:16 +msgid "When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:17 +msgid "" +"When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These " +"indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see " +"<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" +"שינוי גודל מחיצת <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> " + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:10 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "סף האבטחה המבוקש:" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for " +"the average user." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for " +"instance if the system is to be used as a public server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Administrator</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will " +"send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations " +"which require notification to a system administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:43 +msgid "" +"A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - " +"where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:48 +msgid "" +"The system sends such messages as <emphasis role=\"bold\">Unix Mailspool " +"messages</emphasis>, not as \"ordinary\" SMTP mail: this user must therefore " +"be configured for receiving such mail!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:53 +msgid "" +"It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in " +"the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:15 +msgid "Select and use ISOs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "מבוא" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose " +"which image best suits your needs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:21 +msgid "There are three types of installation media:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this " +"media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to " +"install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice " +"of which Desktop environment to install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try " +"out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to " +"your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can " +"be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating " +"system itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:37 +msgid "" +"The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you " +"have fewer configuration options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations, " +"they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's " +"containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer " +"and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that " +"are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on " +"the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:53 +msgid "" +"These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if " +"bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a " +"DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:58 +msgid "More details are given in the next sections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:61 +msgid "Media" +msgstr "מדיה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:63 +msgid "Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to " +"install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, " +"USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"You can find Mageia ISO's <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/" +"downloads/\">here</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:70 +msgid "Classical installation media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:72 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:104 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:171 +msgid "Common features" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:75 +msgid "These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:78 +msgid "" +"They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously " +"installed version of Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:82 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:118 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:174 +msgid "Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen: " +"<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware " +"Detection Tool</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:91 +msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:95 +msgid "" +"You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:102 +msgid "Live media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:107 +msgid "" +"Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install " +"it" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:111 +msgid "The Live media also includes an Installer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:114 +msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:121 +msgid "They contain non-free software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:126 +msgid "Live DVD Plasma" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:129 +msgid "Plasma desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:132 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:146 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:160 +msgid "All available languages are present" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:135 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:149 +msgid "64-bit architecture only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:140 +msgid "Live DVD GNOME" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:143 +msgid "GNOME desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:154 +msgid "Live DVD Xfce" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:157 +msgid "Xfce desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:163 +msgid "32 or 64-bit architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:169 +msgid "Net install media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:177 +msgid "First steps are English language only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:182 +msgid "netinstall.iso" +msgstr "netinstall.iso" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:185 +msgid "" +"Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free " +"software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:191 +msgid "netinstall-nonfree.iso" +msgstr "netinstall-nonfree.iso" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:194 +msgid "" +"Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:202 +msgid "Downloading and Checking Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:204 +msgid "Downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or " +"BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as " +"the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth " +"is too low." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:209 +msgid "" +"If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and " +"<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO " +"integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for " +"use in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:217 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:222 +msgid "In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:225 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:229 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:233 +msgid "Checking the integrity of the downloaded media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:235 +msgid "" +"The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an " +"algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of " +"your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the " +"checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not " +"match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or " +"attempt a repair using BitTorrent." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:241 +msgid "" +"To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need " +"to be root), and:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:245 +msgid "" +"To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:249 +msgid "" +"To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:254 +msgid "" +"To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:258 +msgid "Example:" +msgstr "דוגמה:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:260 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:265 +msgid "" +"then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO " +"checksum provided by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:270 +msgid "Burn or dump the ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:271 +msgid "" +"The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a " +"USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will " +"actually be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:275 +msgid "Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:276 +msgid "" +"Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis> " +"image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or <emphasis>files</" +"emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia wiki</link> for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:282 +msgid "Dump the ISO to a USB stick" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:283 +msgid "" +"All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick " +"and then use that to boot and install the system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:286 +msgid "" +"Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on " +"the device and all existing data will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:290 +msgid "" +"Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia " +"ISO partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:292 +msgid "" +"So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will " +"then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer " +"formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original " +"capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:299 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:300 +msgid "" +"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:303 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Windows" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:304 +msgid "You could try:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:307 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US\">Rufus</link> using the " +"\"ISO image\" option" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:311 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager\">Win32 " +"Disk Imager</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:317 +msgid "Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:319 +msgid "" +"It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting " +"potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:325 +msgid "Open a console" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:328 +msgid "" +"Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command " +"<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:332 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Root.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:338 +msgid "" +"Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open " +"any application or file manager that could access or read it)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:343 +msgid "Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:345 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:351 +msgid "" +"Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example " +"<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:354 +msgid "" +"Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command <command>dmesg</" +"command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can see the device " +"name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case, <filename>sdd</" +"filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its size is 2GB:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><screen> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360 +#, no-wrap +msgid "" +"[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd\n" +"[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000\n" +"[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3\n" +"[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device\n" +"[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash\n" +"[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB\n" +"[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected\n" +"[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0\n" +"[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4\n" +"[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)\n" +"[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off\n" +"[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00\n" +"[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found\n" +"[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through\n" +"[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1\n" +"[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:380 +msgid "" +"Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/" +"sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:382 +msgid "" +"Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg: <filename>/dev/sdd</" +"filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:384 +msgid "" +"Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/" +"sdd bs=1M</literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><tip><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:388 +msgid "" +"It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role=\"bold\">if</emphasis> " +"stands for <emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role=\"bold\">of</emphasis> stands for " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role=\"bold\">f</" +"emphasis>ile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:392 +msgid "Enter the command: <command>sync</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:395 +msgid "This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:3 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other Countries</" +"emphasis> option and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list, " +"after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the " +"main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:45 +msgid "" +"In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method, so users should not need to configure it manually. " +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions " +"and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu> " +"<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running " +"<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:29 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass." +"png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format " +"the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can " +"preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated /" +"home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) partition " +"itself)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:50 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Upgrade</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">שדרוג</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:52 +msgid "Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still " +"supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been " +"thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached " +"its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a <quote>clean</" +"quote> install instead, while preserving your <filename>/home</filename> " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:67 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the " +"language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> " +"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis role=" +"\"bold\"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:14 +msgid "Select Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:24 +msgid "Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:27 +msgid "" +"A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based " +"upon your previously selected language and timezone choices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:20 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "מקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis> " +"to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:50 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as " +"though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this " +"and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will " +"be applied." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the " +"Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:34 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "יש לבחור את השפה העיקרית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for " +"your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the " +"installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be " +"installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple " +"languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add " +"extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:58 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your " +"preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked " +"as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:82 +msgid "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is " +"inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed " +"languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:89 +msgid "" +"You can change the language for your system post-installation in the " +"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>System</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>localization for your system</guimenuitem> </" +"menuchoice>." +msgstr "" +"ניתן לשנות את השפה של המערכת שלך אחרי ההתקנה בתוך <menuchoice> <guimenu>מרכז " +"הבקרה של Mageia</guimenu> <guimenuitem>מערכת</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>המקמת המערכת שלך</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:10 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:29 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and " +"USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force evdev</" +"guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work on a " +"mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:7 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:11 +msgid "" +"To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the " +"software <emphasis role=\"bold\">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead " +"(available in the Mageia repositories)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:16 +msgid "" +"For more information, see: <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-" +"efi_and_Mageia\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:15 +msgid "Bootloader" +msgstr "מנהל אתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:18 +msgid "Available Bootloaders" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:20 +msgid "Grub2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:22 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:25 +msgid "" +"GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the " +"bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:30 +msgid "" +"By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master " +"Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:39 +msgid "GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:43 +msgid "" +"By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI " +"System Partition)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer " +"(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP " +"created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will " +"be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is " +"required, whatever the number of operating systems you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:55 +msgid "rEFInd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:57 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:59 +msgid "" +"rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed " +"EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:65 +msgid "" +"Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal> " +"option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system " +"architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit " +"machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available " +"to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:75 +msgid "Bootloader Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:78 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "הגדרות עיקריות של מנהל האתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata xml:id=\"setupBootloader-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:89 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader to use</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:92 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu), " +"can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and " +"<literal>UEFI</literal> systems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu) is an alternative " +"option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:105 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot device</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:107 +msgid "Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:111 +msgid "" +"There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: " +"<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:115 +msgid "" +"When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be " +"listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:122 +msgid "" +"This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating " +"system is started up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:126 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:127 +msgid "" +"This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username " +"and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting " +"entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely " +"to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the " +"password is the one chosen hereafter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:136 +msgid "Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:139 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again)</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set " +"above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:144 en/setupBootloader.xml:250 +msgid "<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:147 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:148 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power " +"management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it " +"could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if " +"you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance " +"random reboots or system lockups)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:156 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:157 +msgid "" +"This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core " +"processors" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:161 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:162 +msgid "" +"Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable " +"Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and " +"Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:168 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:169 +msgid "" +"Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a " +"specific processor in an SMP system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:175 +msgid "Bootloader Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות מנהל אתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:176 +msgid "" +"If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the " +"bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the " +"screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the " +"subsequent screenshot for your options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:181 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:188 +msgid "Your rEFInd configuration options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system partition." +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:195 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install in /EFI/BOOT.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:196 en/setupBootloader.xml:239 +msgid "" +"This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP " +"(EFI System Partition). This can be useful when:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:198 en/setupBootloader.xml:241 +msgid "" +"(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed " +"and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in /EFI/" +"BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:202 en/setupBootloader.xml:245 +msgid "" +"(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written " +"bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:207 +msgid "" +"If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous " +"section, then your bootloader configuration options are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:211 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:220 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Default</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:221 +msgid "The operating system to be started up by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:224 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Append</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:225 +msgid "" +"This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to " +"give you more information as it boots." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:229 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Probe foreign OS</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:230 +msgid "" +"If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to " +"add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, " +"then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:236 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install in /EFI/BOOT. </emphasis>(Note: this menu " +"option only becomes available where the installer detects that a machine is " +"in UEFI mode)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-" +"setupBootloader4.png\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\" align=" +"\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:261 +msgid "<emphasis>Video mode</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:262 +msgid "" +"This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If " +"you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:267 +msgid "<emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:268 +msgid "" +"Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather " +"chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is " +"missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you " +"understand the implications, and wish to proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:274 +msgid "" +"Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer " +"supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this " +"resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or " +"rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:283 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png\" align=\"center" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:290 +msgid "Other Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות אחרות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:292 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:293 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond " +"the scope of this documentation. However, in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect " +"Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the " +"documentation for the relevant operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:296 +msgid "Installing Without a Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:297 +msgid "" +"While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 " +"Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are " +"doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be " +"unable to start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:10 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39 +msgid "" +"DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older " +"SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use " +"and subsequently fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:44 +msgid "" +"If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which " +"SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) " +"correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/software.xml:4 +msgid "Software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/software.xml:7 +msgid "Media Selection" +msgstr "בחירת מאגר" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:10 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות קול" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:26 +msgid "" +"This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the " +"installer, and this driver should work without problems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:29 +msgid "" +"However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run " +"<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice> " +"<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the " +"<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis> " +"screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice " +"about how to solve the problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:43 +msgid "Advanced" +msgstr "מתקדם" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:10 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography +#. 2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK " +"to erase <emphasis role=\"bold\">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role=\"bold\">all " +"data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:11 +msgid "Testing Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:16 +msgid "Live mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:23 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:30 +msgid "Testing hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:33 +msgid "" +"One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is " +"correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in " +"the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:40 +msgid "network interface: configure it with net_applet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:44 +msgid "graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:49 +msgid "sound: a jingle has already been played" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:53 +msgid "printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:57 +msgid "scanner: scan a document from ..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If " +"not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/testing.xml:66 +msgid "" +"The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to " +"proceed with the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:73 +msgid "Launch installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:76 +msgid "" +"To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, " +"simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live " +"desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link linkend=" +"\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</link> step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:82 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:10 +msgid "Uninstalling Mageia" +msgstr "הסרת Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:18 +msgid "" +"If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short " +"you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the " +"possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:23 +msgid "" +"After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select " +"<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot " +"loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no " +"option to choose your Mageia operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on " +"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control Panel</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Storage</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You " +"will recognise a Mageia partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</" +"literal>, and also by their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each " +"of these partitions and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the " +"space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it " +"(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the " +"existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other " +"partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As always, when " +"changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything important to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/unused.xml:3 +msgid "Keep or delete unused material" +msgstr "" + +#. 2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused " +"hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:18 +msgid "" +"If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on " +"different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files " +"then you might wish to accept this proposal." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:22 +msgid "" +"Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and " +"localization files that will be removed if you proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just " +"take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a " +"blank screen - this is normal." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a097a7a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<book version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="DrakLive-installer" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/19 apb: Disabled setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml because I have included it at the end of setupBootloader.xml--> +<!--2018/03/24 apb: Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml, ask_mntpoint_s.xml, takeOverHdConfirm.xml, diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml because I have grouped them together under diskPartitioning.xml (as per DrakX)--> +<title>התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת</title> + + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>March 2016</date> + + <revremark>Mageia 5</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + + <cover> + <para role="tagline">התיעוד הרשמי עבור Mageia</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <article> + <title>התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת</title> + + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="unused.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8dc1649 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<article version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="Quick-Startup" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/16 apb: Comment-out setupBootloaderAddEntry because I have incorporated it at the end of setupBootloader--> +<!--2018/03/23 apb: a) Using diskPartitioning.xml to group doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml +b) Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml This is to reflect same arrangement in DrakX--> +<!--2020/06/20 apb: added installUpdates.xml to the includes list: Martin Witaker added this feature to the Live installer 2020/06/27.--> +<title>התקנה מאמצעי התקנה בזמן־אמת</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..188bc54e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="Quick-Startup" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>פברואר 2014</date> + + <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + + <cover> + <para role="tagline">התיעוד הרשמי עבור Mageia</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <article> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2019-01-12 apb: add graphicalConfiguration.xml to group the 3 configureX xml's. --> +<title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>--> +<!-- <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="software.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="locale.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..288c1bc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX-inline.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur--> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:inclu de> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1472434 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="Quick-Startup" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur--> +<!--2018/02/16 apb: 1st run towards improving Mga7 DrakX manual - Text and typography done for all required xml's. + Also, removed the inclusion for setupBootladerAddEntry (was section 24) as I have appended it to the end of section 23 (Bootloader).--> +<!--2018/02/23 apb: Disabled Include for configureX_card_list.xml & configureX_monitor.xml because there is no point to them being Siblings to configureX_chooser.xml (Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration). They are really Children.--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: a) Created this section to merge doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml + b) renamed doPartitionDisks.xml as suggestedPartitioning.xml c) These XML's now exist as xi:includes within the newly created partitionig.xml --> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Merged configureTimezoneUTC.xml and selectCountry.xml within newly created Locale.xml. b) Disabled configureTimezoneUTC.xml and selectCountry.xml Includes and inserted Locale include.--> +<!--2019/01/12 apb: add graphicalConfiguration.xml to hold the configureX xml's.--> +<title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>--> +<!-- <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="software.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="locale.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9bb0f4d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,384 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs"> + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 + +Lebarhon updated for Mageia 6 2016 12 16 (still waiting for clarification about 1.3.2--> +<!--2018/02/07 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Typo--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Update Download.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: Adjusted sections 1.1 and 1.2. + a) The main intro previously stated that there were 2 families of media, but listed at 1.2.4 is NetInstall. Therefore, I included a NetInstall entry in 1.1. + b) Logically followed to move the NetInstall description up frome 1.2.4 to the main intro. + c) Moved the 'Important' text from Live 1.2.3.1 Common features to the main intro because it is not really part of 'Common features', and I think its more natural location is in the main intro.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Centre-align all PNG's.--> +<!--2019/01/03 apb: Update checking.png (which also includes sha512 option). Some rewording to 1.2.4.2, 1.3.1, 1.4.2.3.5. Update text to include sha512 option in 1.3.1 & 1.3.2--> +<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title> + </info> + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose +which image best suits your needs.</para> + <para>There are three types of installation media:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this +media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to +install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice +of which Desktop environment to install.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try +out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to +your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can +be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating +system itself.</para> + <note> + <para>The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you +have fewer configuration options.</para> + </note> + <important> + <para>Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations, +they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases.</para> + </important> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's +containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer +and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that +are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on +the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet.</para> + <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if +bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a +DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>More details are given in the next sections.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>מדיה</title> + <section> + <title>Definition</title> + <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to +install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, +USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to.</para> + <para>You can find Mageia ISO's <link +ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Classical installation media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously +installed version of Mageia</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen: +<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware +Detection Tool</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install +it</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>The Live media also includes an Installer.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>They contain non-free software</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD Plasma</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Plasma desktop environment only</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>64-bit architecture only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD GNOME</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>GNOME desktop environment only</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>64-bit architecture only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD Xfce</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Xfce desktop environment only</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>32 or 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Net install media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>First steps are English language only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>netinstall.iso</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free +software</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>netinstall-nonfree.iso</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title> + <section> + <title>Downloading</title> + <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or +BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as +the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth +is too low.</para> + <para>If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums.</para> + + <para><literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and +<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO +integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for +use in the next section.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Checking.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Download.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the integrity of the downloaded media</title> + <para>The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an +algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of +your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the +checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not +match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or +attempt a repair using BitTorrent.</para> + <para>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need +to be root), and:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>דוגמה:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Md5sum.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO +checksum provided by Mageia.</para> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title> + <para>The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a +USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will +actually be created.</para> + <section> + <title>Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD</title> + <para>Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis> +image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or +<emphasis>files</emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia +wiki</link> for more information.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title> + <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick +and then use that to boot and install the system.</para> + <warning> + <para>Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on +the device and all existing data will be lost.</para> + </warning> + <note> + <para>Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia +ISO partition.</para> + <para>So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will +then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer +formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original +capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick.</para> + </note> + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Mageia</title> + <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Windows</title> + <para>You could try:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the +"ISO image" option</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 Disk +Imager</link></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system</title> + <warning> + <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting +potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device.</para> + </warning> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Open a console</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command +<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open +any application or file manager that could access or read it)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command></para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example +<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick.</para> + <para>Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command +<command>dmesg</command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can +see the device name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case, +<filename>sdd</filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its +size is 2GB:</para> + <para><screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd +[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000 +[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3 +[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device +[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash +[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB +[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected +[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0 +[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4 +[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB) +[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off +[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00 +[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found +[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through +[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1 +[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file +of=/dev/sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command></para> + <para>Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg: +<filename>/dev/sdd</filename></para> + <para>Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso +of=/dev/sdd bs=1M</literal></para> + <tip> + <para>It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role="bold">if</emphasis> stands +for <emphasis role="bold">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis +role="bold">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role="bold">of</emphasis> stands +for <emphasis role="bold">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis +role="bold">f</emphasis>ile</para> + </tip> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: <command>sync</command></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7eba41c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="acceptLicense" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications: + http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html --> +<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore, + but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( + ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one--> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not + sure what is causing the corruption --> +<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 language proofreading --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-license.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Slight reword to '..thanks for looking' sentence.--> +<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">רישיון והערות שחרור</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" fileref="dx2-license.png" align="center" +revision="4"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="live-license.png" xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" revision="5" +align="center" condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="license"> + <info> + <title xml:id="license-ti1">הסכם רישיון</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions +carefully.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must +be accepted before you can continue.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on +<emphasis>Next</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your +interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your +computer.</para> + + + <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section - + marja, 20120405 --> +</section> + + <section xml:id="releaseNotes"> + <!-- + <para> +Release Notes</para> +--> +<info> + <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">הערות שחרור</title> + </info> + + + + <para>Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by +clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd835029 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="addUser" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">ניהול משתמשים</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management). + Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png.--> +<!--2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata fileref="live-user1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="root-password"> + <info> + <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Set Administrator (root) Password:</title> + </info> + + <para>It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a +<literal>superuser</literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the +<emphasis>root </emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same +password in the box underneath, to check that the first entry was not +mistyped.</para> + + <note xml:id="givePassword"> + <para>As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from +red-to-yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green +shield shows you are using a strong password.</para> + + <para>All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters +(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section xml:id="enterUser"> + <info> + <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">הזנת פרטי משתמש</title> + </info> + + <para>Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the +<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office +applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a +computer for.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">סמל</emphasis></para> + + <para>יש ללחוץ על סמל זה אם ברצונך לשנות את סמל המשתמש</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">השם האמיתי</emphasis></para> + + <para>יש להזין את השם האמתי של המשתמש בתיבת טקסט זו</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Name</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real +name. <emphasis role="bold">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis></para> + + <caution condition="live"> + <simpara>The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for +your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be +written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as +Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data...</simpara> + </caution> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">סיסמה</emphasis></para> + + <para>Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user +password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is +both read and write protected (umask=0027)</para> + + <para>You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - +Summary</emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User +management</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section condition="classical" xml:id="addUserAdvanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">ניהול משתמשים (מתקדם)</title> + </info> + + <para>The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings +for the user you are adding.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the +shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are +<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you +added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, +then leave it blank.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if +unsure, leave it blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a78447ee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Supplemental Installation Media</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<!--2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy.--> +<!--2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" +xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source. +The source selection determines which packages will be available during the +subsequent steps.</para> + + <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Choosing and activating the network, if not already up.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the +<emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the +<emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific +repository or your own NFS installation.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <note> + <para>If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit +packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by +selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only +contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be +able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, +the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e55638d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">בחירת נקודות עיגון</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" + with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) --> +<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes --> +<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans + write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it--> +<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) --> +<!-- 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If +you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points +yourself.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For +example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and +<filename>5</filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed +by the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the +partition.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you have several partitions, you can choose various different +<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as +<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and +<filename>/var</filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for +instance <filename>/video</filename> for a partition where you want to store +your films, or perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the +mount point field blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <para>If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename> +(root) partition.</para> + </warning> + + <tip> + <para>If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to +go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where +you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para> + </tip> + + <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on +<emphasis>Next</emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the +partition suggested by DrakX, or more.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2518ad44 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bestTime.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="bestTime"> + + + <info> + <!--2018/03/01 apb: Slight adjustment to text--> +<!--2018/03/03/ apb: Redo definition for the Advanced option,--> +<title xml:id="bestTime-ti1">Clock Settings</title> + </info> + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" +fileref="live-bestTime.png" revision="1" xml:id="bestTime-im1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local +time or UTC time.</para> + <para>In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time +synchronization and specify an NTP server.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e0d0a8a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/bootLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/03/01 apb: a) center-align live-bootCSM.png b) Redo/expand text.--> +<!--2018/02/02 apb: a) update live-bootCSM.png and redo corresponding text.--> +<!--2018/02/03 apb: a) A couple of typos and slight adjustment to some text. b) Added definition for F6 Default boot option.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.2 - F6 last sentence typo.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.2 - Update SC (live-bootCSM.png) and text to reflect changes to Mga7 options.--> +<!--2019/01/08 apb: 1.2 - Add text for Memtest option. 1.3 - Update live-bootUEFI.png and add text for F2 Language option.--> +<!--2019/01/11 apb: 1.3 - Boot Mageia: change Dvd -> + DVD.--> +<title xml:id="bootLive-ti1">Boot Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + <section xml:id="bootLive-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootLive1-ti1">Booting the medium</title> + </info> + <para>You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug +the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer.</para> + <para>If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need +to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try +accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer +will boot.</para> + <tip> + <para>To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try +pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or +<keycap>Esc</keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>, +<keycap>F8</keycap>, <keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the +boot device menu. These (fairly common) keys are just a selection of +possible options though.</para> + </tip> + <note> + <para>The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media +will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or +UEFI type.</para> + </note> + </section> + <section xml:id="biosmode"> + <info> + <title xml:id="biosmode-ti1">In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode</title> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-bootCSM.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject> + <caption> + <para>First screen while booting in BIOS mode</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB +media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS).</para> + <para>Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation.</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to +boot)</emphasis></para> + <para>Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will install Mageia to a hard disk.</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to +boot)</emphasis></para> + <para>Install Mageia using non-free video drivers</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Memory Test</emphasis></para> + <para>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write +operations. Reboot to end the test.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold"> F2 Language</emphasis></para> + <para>Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language +during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then +press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section xml:id="uefimode"> + <info> + <title xml:id="uefimode-ti1">In UEFI mode</title> + </info> + <mediaobject condition="live"> + <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="../live-bootUEFI.png" +align="center" xml:id="bootUEFI-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject> + <caption> + <para>First screen while booting in UEFI mode</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB +media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). Once the +boot is done, you can proceed to the installation</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will install Mageia to a hard disk.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold"> F2 Language</emphasis></para> + <para>Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language +during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then +press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <note> + <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options +duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will +be suffixed with "USB".</para> + </note> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7196b4b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="chooseDesktop" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + <!--Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<info> + <!--2018/02/12 apb: Some wording and typograpy.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Change last 2 paras to bulleted--> +<!--2019/01/05 apb: Slight reword to para's 1,2 & 4.--> +<title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">בחירת שולחן עבודה</title> + </info> + + + + + + <para>Some choices made here will open other screens with related options.</para> + + <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the +installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing +the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop +environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or, +actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software +choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is +lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer +packages installed by default.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9bfaa4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="choosePackageGroups" xreflabel="Choose Package Groups"> + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">בחירת קבוצת חבילות לפי נושא</title> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!--Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on +your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however +more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which +become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Workstation</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">סביבה גרפית</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use +this option to manually add or remove packages</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>See <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a +minimal install (without or with X & IceWM).</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dae984e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="choosePackagesTree" xreflabel="Choose Packages Tree" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Choose Individual Packages</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page--> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your +installation.</para> + + <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the +<emphasis>floppy</emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your +choice of packages (saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this +file to install the same packages on another system, by pressing the same +button during install and choosing to load it.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5cd725cf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Configure Services" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="configureServices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configure your Services</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<!-- 2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png" +xml:id="configureServices-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa1" revision="1">Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa2" revision="1">Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The +settings DrakX chose are usually good.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa4" revision="1">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info +box below.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa5" revision="1">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd2db509 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Configure Timezone" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure your Timezone</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" align="center" +fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="png" +fileref="live-timeZone.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1" revision="1">Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the +same timezone.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2" revision="1">In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time +or to GMT, also known as UTC.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they +are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e62f5a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" + xreflabel="Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" + xml:id="configureX_card_list" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marja 2012-08-08 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-29 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!-- lproof --> +<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: Merge last 2 paras + slight reword.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added xreflabel--> +<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device.</para> + + <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>יצרן</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>then the make of your card</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>and the model of card</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and +open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver +for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides +basic capabilities.</para> + + <caution> + <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis></para> + </caution> + + <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in +some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The +<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to +access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after +your first reboot.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..05b66cb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xreflabel="Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration" + xml:id="configureX_chooser" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page--> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Some text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: a) Changed main options list style. b) Slight reword of 'wrong refresh rates' warning.--> +<!--2018/02/23 apb: Typo.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Slight reword, split 1st para in two.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: [1] Added xreflabel. [2] Changed all instances of 'Graphic Card' to Graphics Card--> +<title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) +you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user +interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply +<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other +graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings +need to be correct.</para> + + <para>Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are +incorrect, or if none are shown.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis role="bold">Graphics Card</emphasis></para> + + <para>If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable +list. See <xref linkend="configureX_card_list"/>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis role="bold">צג</emphasis></para> + + <para>You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the +<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose +<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and +vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref +linkend="configureX_monitor"/>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">רזולוציה</emphasis></para> + + <para>The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis role="bold">בדיקה</emphasis></para> + + <para>The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is +there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your +settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings +will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration +screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is +satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your +settings are on the safe side.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis role="bold">אפשרויות</emphasis></para> + + <para>Here you can choose to enable or disable various options.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are +outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT +displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally +enter standby mode.</para> + </warning> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7c47756 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xreflabel="Choosing your Monitor" + xml:id="configureX_monitor" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!----> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Change list style.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Slight rewording.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added xreflabel.--> +<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours.</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis role="bold">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics +could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something +without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + </warning> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <variablelist spacing="compact"> + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2">התאמה אישית</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5">הכנס-הפעל</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor +type from the monitor database.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7">יצרן</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manufacturer</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>דגם הצג</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <variablelist spacing="compact"> + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9">כללי</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such +as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. +This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA +card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined +automatically. Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your +selections.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..544d163e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskPartitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Partitioning" xml:id="diskPartitioning" xml:lang="he" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + + <!--2018/02/27 apb: Created this XML to group the Partitioning-related elements.--> +<title>חלוקה למחיצות</title> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80144aae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xreflabel="DiskDrake" xml:id="diskdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 + +Lebarhon 20170902 added SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Fix a couple of tags that were out of place + added 'xreflabel="DiskDrake" at start of doc.--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Reformat the text and add titles for the boot partition SC's.--> +<!--2019/01/05 apb: Slight reword to 1st bullet-point.--> +<!--2019/08/06 apb: Slight reword to 2nd bullet-point (was mentioning sda & sdb tabs in previous SC version).--> +<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, +change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details +before you start.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage +device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>, +<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, +or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe +it. <emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label +(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click +<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you +are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you +must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename> +partition. The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename> +partition must NOT be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </warning> + + <important> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System +Partition) is present and correctly mounted on +<filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. See Figure 1 below.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot +partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </important> + + <figure> + <title>EFI System Partition</title> + +<mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <figure> + <title>BIOS boot partition</title> + +<mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28fdc127 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="doPartitionDisks" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--lebarhon 20161216 updated for Mageia 6 + +lebarhon 20170209 added SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. Added link to diskdrake in 2nd Note--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align last two PNG's. Also, fix some wonky XML formatting.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Moved 'Erase ...' & 'Custom ...' list items up with the other list items. I can see the reason for splitting the list with the example SC, + but I think this way is clearer (flow) overall. I don't believe that combining the list will interfere with the example SC and the relevant list item.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2019/01/11 apb: Auto allocation of drive space rules: small edits for style consistency.--> +<!--2019/07/06 apb: Added live-doPartitionDisksk.png, as it was previously sharing the DrakX screenshot.--> +<!--2019/08/23 apb: Moved 'Important' note from 'Erase and Use Entire Disk' to 'Use Free Space on a Windows Partition'. Slight text tweak to to first para, 'Warning' and 'Important' --> +<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Suggested Partitioning</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the +DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to +the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s).</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <title>אפשרויות ראשיות</title> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have +been found and may be used for the installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6"><emphasis role="bold">Use Free Space</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for +your new Mageia installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8"><emphasis role="bold">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="suggestedPartitioning-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may +offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia +installation but see the warning below.</para> + + <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in +light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their +intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by +clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following +screenshot:<mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + + <warning> + <para>This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is +a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important +files before proceeding.</para> + </warning> + + <important> + <para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">The partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down +correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, +although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been +moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia.</para> + </important> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12"><emphasis role="bold">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you +intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data +on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16"><emphasis role="bold">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your +hard drive(s).</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> +option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to +the following rules:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is +created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root) partition.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions +are created</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename> +with a maximum of 50 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will +create three partitions:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>50 GB for <filename>/</filename></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>4 GB for <filename>swap</filename></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be +automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted +on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk +partitioning</emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has +been correctly done.</para> + + <para>If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned +disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already +exist. It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with +the Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any +other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for +filesystem type.</para> + + <para>See <xref linkend="diskdrake"/> for information on how to proceed.</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <important> + <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the +partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a +drive.</para> + + <para>Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a +device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an +alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following +settings:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</para> + </important> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e0f9f24 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">ברכות</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png" +align="center" revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa1" revision="2">You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to +remove the installation medium and reboot your computer.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating +system to start (if there are more than one on your computer).</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa3" revision="1">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install +will be automatically selected and started.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa4" revision="1">Enjoy!</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa5" revision="1">Visit <link ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/">www.mageia.org/en/</link> +if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f6d0f54e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/firewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xreflabel="Firewall" xml:id="firewall" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel for this section.--> +<!--2019/07/23 apb: Added dx2-firewall.png for this section.--> +<title xml:id="firewall-ti1">חומת אש</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="firewall-pa1">This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they +determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the +target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the +system to be accessible from the Internet.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-firewall.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is +accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no +firewall)</emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine - +an option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer +since it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in +the context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) +for temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and +debugging purposes.</para> + + <para>All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will +enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible +from the network.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">מתקדם</emphasis></para> + + <para>The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable +a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank +separated)</para> + + <para><emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis></para> + + <simplelist> + <member>- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned +to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as +defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;</member> + + <member>- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> +or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the +service.</member> + </simplelist> + + <para>For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore +is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 +couples for the same port.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e64b7eb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="formatPartitions" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 --> +<!--2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on +partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to +check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para> + + <tip> + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on +<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and +then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where +you can choose to view details of your partitions.</para> + </tip> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selections, click on +<emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee807d79 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/graphicalConfiguration.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="graphicalConfiguration" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <info> + <!--2019/01/12 apb: Created this xml as parent for the 'configureX' xml's.--> +<title xml:id="graphicalConfiguration-ti1">Graphical Configuration</title> + </info> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65f4b8b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="installUpdates" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename--> +<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added bullets to some text.--> +<!--2020/06/28 apb: Added live-installUpdates.png (this feature was added to the live installer by Martin Witaker 2020/06/27).--> +<title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">עדכונים</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png" format="png" revision="1" +xml:id="installUpdates-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-installUpdates.png" format="png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa1">Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been +updated or improved.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa2">Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you +aren't connected to the Internet</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-pa3">יש ללחוץ על <emphasis>קדימה</emphasis> להמשך</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03732c76 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="installer" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/11 apb: Text and typography. F6 Default option needs to be better defined.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Removed instances of surplus para tags from before and after some itemizedlist tags. These were present in the import from Mga6 WS. + Some listitem end-tags were directly after mediaobject end-tags, while the main listitem element was above the mediaobject. + So I moved the listitem end-tags above the mediaobjects, to their natural positions. This also was in the imported XML.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated welcome.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: a) Updated rest of BIOS PNG's, b) Refined text and reworked this XML.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed main list type--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Split 1,1 Caution into 2 paras.--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Fixed UEFI section nest level.--> +<!--2018/03/16 apb: Fixed incorrect value for title installer-ti1 (leading to output error since last year in Documentation Workspace - and inherited here, when imported).--> +<!--2019/01/02 apb: 1.2 Typo. 1.2.1: Update dx-welcome.png (BIOS Welcome screen) to Mga7 and strip text for the options which have been removed from the Mga7 Welcome screen.--> +<!--2019/01/08 apb: 1.2.2: Update dx-welcome2.png (UEFI Welcome screen) to Mga7 and add text for F2 Languages option.--> +<!--2019/07/17 apb: Force dx-welcome.png and dx-welcome2.png to be 800px wide.--> +<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, כלי ההתקנה של Mageia</title> + </info> + + <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia +Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as +possible.</para> + + <section> + <title>צעדי ההתקנה</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which +is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Each step has one or more screens, which may also have +<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required +options.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details +about the particular step.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <caution> + <para>If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it +is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a +partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your +computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well +leave you with an unusable system.</para> + + <para>If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a +text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that, +press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> +<keycap>Delete</keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot.</para> + </caution> + </section> + + <section> + <title>מסך קבלת הפנים של ההתקנה</title> + + <para>The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the +Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of +the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type.</para> + + <para>The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will +start the installer, and is normally all that you will need.</para> + + <section> + <title>Legacy (BIOS) Systems</title> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para> + + <para>Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will +automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Rescue System</emphasis></para> + + <para>This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing +Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Memory Test</emphasis></para> + + <para>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write +operations. Reboot to end the test.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">F2: שפה</emphasis></para> + + <para>יש ללחוץ על F2 להצגת שפות חלופיות.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>מערכות UEFI</title> + + <para>From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to +enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap> +to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either +re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use +it to restore a Windows bootloader.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">F2: שפה:</emphasis> יש ללחוץ על <keycap>F2</keycap> +להצגת שפות חלופיות.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, +and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with "USB".</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title> + + <section> + <title>אין ממשק גרפי</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language +Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and +older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command> +at the prompt.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be +possible. In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use +this press <keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen +and confirm with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black +screen with a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command> +and press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text +mode.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Install Freezes</title> + + <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a +problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware +detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type +<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined +with other parameters as necessary.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>RAM problem</title> + + <para>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the +available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the +<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where +<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of +RAM. e.g. <literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Dynamic partitions</title> + + <para>If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to +<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not +possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a +<literal>Basic</literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link +ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93218cfd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/locale.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="locale" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <title>Locale</title> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbeff33f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/login.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="login" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + <info> + <!--2018/03/03 apb: a) Slight adjustment to text and change image caption from KDM to SDDM also change KDE to KDE Plasma. b) update SC to Mga6.--> +<title xml:id="label-to-adapt-ti1">Login Screen</title> + </info> + <mediaobject condition="live"> + <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="login-im1" +fileref="live-login.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject> + <caption> + <para>SDDM login screen</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + <para>Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen.</para> + <para>Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find +yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live +medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia +installation.</para> + <para>You can find further documentation in <link +xmlns:ns0="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" ns0:href="../../installer/">the +Mageia wiki</link>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c22e8f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="media_selection" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Available Media</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)--> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)--> +<!--2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para.--> +<!--2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d20c509 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="minimal-install" xreflabel="Minimal Install" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to + start a new page--> +<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Moved 'Minimal Instalation ...' para to top and rework the following paras.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimal Install</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for +Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use +this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package +selection</emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref +linkend="choosePackagesTree"/>.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting +everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see +<xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"/>.</para> + + <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package +selection</emphasis> option in the same screen.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see +screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as +documentation and <quote>X</quote>.</para> + + <para>If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a +lightweight desktop environment) will also be included.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and +<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link +xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation +Project</link> and the <link +xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU +coreutils</link> info pages.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..411c4d4b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="misc-params"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Configuration Summary</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png--> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summaryTop.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on +the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the +settings here and change them if you want by pressing +<emphasis>Configure</emphasis>.</para> + + <note> + <para>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings +unless:<itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>there are known issues with a default setting</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the default setting has already been tried and it fails</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-system"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Timezone</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You +can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3"><emphasis role="bold">Country / Region</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the +setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Bootloader</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a" revision="2">DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more +information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para> + + + <!-- revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c"--> +</listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">User management</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a" revision="2">You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own +<filename>/home</filename> directories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Services</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run in the background +(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may +prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see +<xref linkend="configureServices"/></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">מקלדת</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type +of keyboard.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind +that your passwords are going to change too.</para> + </note> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Mouse</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a" revision="1">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs +etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Sound card</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer will use the default driver if one is available.</para> + + <para>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other +possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, +but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you +can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Graphical interface</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a" revision="1">This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For +more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/></para> + + + <!--revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b"--> +</listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="summaryBottom-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-network"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free +drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control +Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media +repositories.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor +that interface as well.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Proxies</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider +Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a +proxy service.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters +you need to enter here.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">הגדרות אבטחה</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1"><emphasis role="bold">Security Level</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a" revision="1">The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting +(Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits +your usage.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Firewall</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b" revision="1">The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on +your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound +connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your +computer normally.</para> + + <para revision="1">Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are +continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly +<quote>safe</quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as +covert data channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons.</para> + + <para revision="1">למידע נוסף, נא לראות <xref linkend="firewall"/>.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c" revision="1">Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may +be very risky.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ab8d929 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/reboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="reboot"> + <!--Lebarhon 20170210 updated for Mageia6--> +<!--2018/03/03 apb: Slight text adjustment and update PNG's to Mga6.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="reboot-ti1">הפעלה מחדש</title> + </info> + + + <para>Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your +computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer.</para> + <important> + <simpara>Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the +<emphasis role="bold">same</emphasis> order.</simpara> + </important> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-reboot2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + <simpara>When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>.</simpara> + <simpara>When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These +indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see +<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>).</simpara> + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="reboot-im1" +fileref="live-reboot.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22db7045 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="resizeFATChoose"> + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en + in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2--> +<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">שינוי גודל מחיצת +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> </title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition. +Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + + +<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2"> +.......</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>--> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06db666c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="securityLevel" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">סף האבטחה המבוקש:</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1"><emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for +the average user.</para> + + <para revision="1"><emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for +instance if the system is to be used as a public server.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Security Administrator</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will +send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations +which require notification to a system administrator.</para> + + <para>A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - +where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages.</para> + + <note> + <para>The system sends such messages as <emphasis role="bold">Unix Mailspool +messages</emphasis>, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore +be configured for receiving such mail!</para> + </note> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in +the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f42e94bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectCountry" xreflabel="Select Country" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6--> +<!--2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, +like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country +can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other +Countries</emphasis> option and choose your country / region there.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list, +after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the +main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice.</para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="inputMethod"> + <info> + <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa4" revision="1">In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an +input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input +multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the +default input method, so users should not need to configure it +manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar +functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package +selection.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa5" revision="1">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it +post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu> +<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running +<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>.</para> + </note> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0989dc9d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="selectInstallClass" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR --> +<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to + "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409--> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: a) Changed list style - was bulleted. b) Removed warning about aborting the installation, as this is now at the intro of section 2 (DrakX, the Mageia Installer).--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: a) Changed list style.--> +<!--2019/01/03 apb: a) Install: reword text about retaining an existing /home partition.--> +<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Install or Upgrade</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist spacing="compact"> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis></para> + + <para>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format +the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can +preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated +/home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) +partition itself).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">שדרוג</emphasis></para> + + <para>Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <important> + <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still +supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been +thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached +its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a +<quote>clean</quote> install instead, while preserving your +<filename>/home</filename> partition.</para> + </important> + + <tip> + <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you +can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the +language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis +role="bold"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para> + </tip> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..740c7362 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="selectKeyboard" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-selectKeyboard.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2019/01/03 apb: Minor edit to Note (insert colon).--> +<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">מקלדת</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable +keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard +layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the +specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There +may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also +look here: <link +xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis> +to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there.</para> + + <para revision="1"><note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue, +you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as +though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this +and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will +be applied.</para> + </note></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an +extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the +Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92582a2b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectKeyboardLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/03/01 apb: Slight adjustment to text--> +<!--2018/03/20 apb: Adjustment to text--> +<title xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-ti1">Select Keyboard</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-selectKeyboard.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia.</para> + + <para>A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based +upon your previously selected language and timezone choices.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d92d090a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="selectLanguage" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look --> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong + code in figure, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean + up mess made of this header by xxe --> +<!--2018/09/02 apb: Text and typography. Classical/Live Conditions not respected in HTML or PDF output.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Changed 'preferred language' Warning tag to Important--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-selectLanguage.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: Slight reword of 'Choosing more than one language'--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Changed first 3 paras to Itemizedlist--> +<!--2018/03/11 apb: Test to see if placing condition within listitem - rather than within para - will fix seeing both conditions together in output.--> +<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">יש לבחור את השפה העיקרית</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your +continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for +your installed system.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem condition="live"> + <para>Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the +installation and for your installed system.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be +installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple +languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add +extra language support after installation.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-language.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <important condition="classical"> + <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your +preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked +as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen.</para> + </important> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then +it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the +<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is +inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed +languages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ניתן לשנות את השפה של המערכת שלך אחרי ההתקנה בתוך <menuchoice> <guimenu>מרכז +הבקרה של Mageia</guimenu> <guimenuitem>מערכת</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>המקמת המערכת שלך</guimenuitem> </menuchoice></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..714a20f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="selectMouse" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place--> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a +different one here.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and +USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force +evdev</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work +on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27cdb8d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xreflabel="Bootloader" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="setupBootloader"> + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/06 apb: Modified the layout for a (hopefully) easier flow. Also commented-out setupBootloaderAddEntry (was section 24) and incorporated it here, at the end of this file.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed 'Advanced' list style.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed main list style.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Typo.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Use 'xi:include' for setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml, as that is how it is called by the inline-help drakx/perl routine.--> +<!--2019/07/18 apb: Rewrite 1.1, to accomodate inclusion of rEFInd option, and modify 1.2.1, 1.2.2 accordingly.--> +<!--2019/08/01 apb: 1.1.1 reworded to: GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system. Added warning text for 1.2.2 Do not Touch MBR/ESP part.--> +<!--2020/06/28 apb: 1.2.2 updated SC's to reflect changes to installer by Martin Whitaker (2020/06/27): Install to EFI/Boot. Adjust text to match.--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">מנהל אתחול</title> + </info> + <section> + <title>Available Bootloaders</title> + <section> + <title>Grub2</title> + <itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis></para> + <listitem> + <para>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the +bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master +Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis></para> + <listitem> + <para>GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI +System Partition).</para> + <para>If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer +(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP +created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will +be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is +required, whatever the number of operating systems you have.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>rEFInd</title> + <itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis role="bold">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis></para> + <listitem> + <para>rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed +EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <note> + <para>Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal> +option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system +architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit +machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available +to you.</para> + </note> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti2">Bootloader Setup</title> + </info> + <section> + <title>הגדרות עיקריות של מנהל האתחול</title> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata xml:id="setupBootloader-im1" +fileref="live-setupBootloader.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Bootloader to use</emphasis></para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu), +can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and +<literal>UEFI</literal> systems.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu) is an alternative +option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot device</emphasis></para> + <warning> + <para>Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing.</para> + </warning> + <note> + <para>There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: +<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable.</para> + </note> + <para>When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be +listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis></para> + <para>This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating +system is started up.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + <para>This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username +and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting +entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely +to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the +password is the one chosen hereafter.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">סיסמה</emphasis></para> + <para>Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password (again)</emphasis></para> + <para>Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set +above</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis>Advanced</emphasis></para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis></para> + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power +management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it +could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if +you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance +random reboots or system lockups).</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis></para> + <para>This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core +processors</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis></para> + <para>Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable +Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and +Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis></para> + <para>Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a +specific processor in an SMP system</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>הגדרות מנהל אתחול</title> + <para>If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the +bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the +screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the +subsequent screenshot for your options.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="rEFIndLoaderConfig.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Your rEFInd configuration options:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system +partition.</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install in /EFI/BOOT.</emphasis></para> + <para>This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP +(EFI System Partition). This can be useful when:</para> + <para>(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed +and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in +/EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive.</para> + <para>(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written +bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous +section, then your bootloader configuration options are shown below:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader3.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis></para> + <para>The operating system to be started up by default.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Append</emphasis></para> + <para>This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to +give you more information as it boots.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Probe foreign OS</emphasis></para> + <para>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to +add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, +then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install in /EFI/BOOT. </emphasis>(Note: this menu +option only becomes available where the installer detects that a machine is +in UEFI mode).</para> + <para>This option installs the bootloader in the /EFI/BOOT directory of the ESP +(EFI System Partition). This can be useful when:</para> + <para>(a) Installing onto a removable drive (e.g. a USB stick) that can be removed +and plugged into a different machine. If the bootloader is stored in +/EFI/BOOT, UEFI BIOS's will detect it and allow you to boot from that drive.</para> + <para>(b) As a workaround where, due to a buggy UEFI BIOS, the newly written +bootloader for Mageia will not be recognized at end of the installation.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis>Advanced</emphasis></para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata +fileref="live-setupBootloader4.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Video mode</emphasis></para> + <para>This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If +you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth +options.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis></para> + <para>Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather +chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is +missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you +understand the implications, and wish to proceed.</para> + <warning> + <para>Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer +supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this +resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or +rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader5.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>אפשרויות אחרות</title> + <section> + <title>Using an existing bootloader</title> + <para>The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond +the scope of this documentation. However, in most cases it will involve +running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect +Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the +documentation for the relevant operating system.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Installing Without a Bootloader</title> + <para>While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 +Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are +doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be +unable to start.</para> + </section> + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09fc8060 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry"> + + + <info> + <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page + +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 Updated for Mageia 6--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title> + </info> + + <para>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the +software <emphasis role="bold">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead +(available in the Mageia repositories).</para> + + <note> + <para>For more information, see: <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link></para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7778c15f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="setupSCSI" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 --> +<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) --> +<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the + Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older +SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use +and subsequently fail to recognise the drive.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which +SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) +correctly.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7406ea3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/software.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="software" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xreflabel="Software"> + + + <!--2018/02/27 apb: Created this XML to gather together the XML's which can make up a Software group.--> +<title>Software</title> + + <section> + <title>בחירת מאגר</title> + + <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + </section> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0c4a356 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/soundConfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="soundConfig" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">הגדרות קול</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="soundConfig-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the +installer, and this driver should work without problems.</para> + + <para>However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run +<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice> +<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the +<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis> +screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice +about how to solve the problem.</para> + + <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">מתקדם</title> + </info> + + <para>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other +possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, +but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you +can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bd2f98f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 --> +<!-- test comment - johnr --> +<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct + hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I + saw this help screen when I had only one HD --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your +choice.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK +to erase <emphasis role="bold">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis +role="bold">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role="bold">all +data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e187f383 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/testing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="testing" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <info> + <!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.1.1 Remove empty 'webcam:' description relating to MCC/Hardware (and it is not an item there anyway).--> +<title xml:id="testing-ti1">Testing Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + + <section xml:id="testing-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing1-ti1">Live mode</title> + </info> + + <para>This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis +role="bold">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing2-ti1">Testing hardware</title> + </info> + + <para>One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is +correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in +the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>network interface: configure it with net_applet</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>sound: a jingle has already been played</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>scanner: scan a document from ...</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If +not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit.</para> + + <note> + <para>The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to +proceed with the installation.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing3-ti1">Launch installation</title> + </info> + + <para>To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, +simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live +desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link +linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode-install.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a15c43fd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/uninstall-Mageia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="uninstall-Mageia" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <!--Lebarhon 2015-07-06 Not true with UEFI +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 this page should be deleted or rewritten.--> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti1">הסרת Mageia</title> + </info> + + + + + + <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short +you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the +possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para> + + <para>After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select +<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot +loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no +option to choose your Mageia operating system.</para> + + <para>In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on +<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control +Panel</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>Storage</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk +Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You will recognise a Mageia +partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</literal>, and also by +their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each of these partitions +and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the space.</para> + + <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it +(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter.</para> + + <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the +existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other +partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis +role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As +always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything +important to you.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4374ff89 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/he/unused.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="unused" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="unused-ti1">Keep or delete unused material</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<!--2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="unused-im1" +fileref="live-unused.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused +hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them.</para> + + <para>If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on +different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files +then you might wish to accept this proposal.</para> + + <para>Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and +localization files that will be removed if you proceed.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just +take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a +blank screen - this is normal.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e1a0d78 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he.po @@ -0,0 +1,9609 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Control Center Help package. +# +# Translators: +# Omer I.S., 2020 +# Yaron Shahrabani <sh.yaron@gmail.com>, 2020 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-09-08 15:28+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-11-06 09:07+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Omer I.S.\n" +"Language-Team: Hebrew (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/language/" +"he/)\n" +"Language: he\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n == 1 && n % 1 == 0) ? 0 : (n == 2 && n % " +"1 == 0) ? 1: (n % 10 == 0 && n % 1 == 0 && n > 10) ? 2 : 3;\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11 +msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories" +msgstr "גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של WebDAV" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --dav" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:19 +msgid "diskdrake--dav1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure " +"WebDAV shares</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21 +#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:20 +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:18 en/draksambashare.xml:18 en/drakvpn.xml:16 +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:27 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:41 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:27 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:46 +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:17 en/system-config-printer.xml:21 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "מבוא" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a " +"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it " +"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a " +"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV " +"server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40 +msgid "Creating a new entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if " +"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. " +"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue " +"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking " +"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the " +"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct " +"it, if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:54 +msgid "diskdrake--dav3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58 +msgid "" +"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount " +"point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61 +msgid "" +"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other " +"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--dav4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the " +"access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74 +msgid "" +"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</" +"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your new mount point is " +"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked whether " +"or not to save the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose " +"this option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. " +"If your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:12 +msgid "Share your hard disk partitions" +msgstr "שיתוף מחיצות הכונן שלך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +msgid "diskdrake --fileshare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20 +msgid "diskdrake--fileshare.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:26 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:25 +msgid "" +"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the " +"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home " +"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have " +"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled " +"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:36 +msgid "" +"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to " +"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No " +"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on " +"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on " +"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for " +"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their " +"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically " +"created by the system. You will be asked about this later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you " +"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. " +"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on " +"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both " +"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any " +"required packages will be installed if necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In " +"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows " +"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare " +"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, " +"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the " +"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information " +"about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:61 +msgid "" +"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and " +"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:66 +msgid "" +"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her " +"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers " +"have this facility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/MCC-cover.xml:9 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/MCC.xml:1 +#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "he" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3 +msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories" +msgstr "גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --nfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:11 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17 +msgid "." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix " +"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. " +"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a " +"user with tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38 +msgid "Procedure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers " +"which share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the " +"shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:47 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51 +msgid "" +"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have " +"to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:56 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and " +"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After " +"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:73 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77 +msgid "" +"On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, " +"a message will displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab " +"modifications\". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the " +"network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file " +"browser, for example in Dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:85 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3 +msgid "CD/DVD burner" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:5 +msgid "diskdrake --removable" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:10 +msgid "diskdrake--removable.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is found under the tab " +"Local disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your " +"removable hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:20 +msgid "Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:22 +msgid "" +"At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and " +"the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change them. " +"Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:28 +msgid "Mount point" +msgstr "נקודת עיגון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:37 en/harddrake2.xml:66 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:45 +msgid "user/nouser" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:47 +msgid "" +"user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this " +"option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is " +"the only one who can umount it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11 +msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories" +msgstr "גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפים של Windows (סמבה)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --smb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) " +"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared " +"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with " +"tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of " +"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who " +"share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the " +"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you " +"have to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:52 +msgid "diskdrake--smb2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount " +"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the " +"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60 +msgid "" +"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to " +"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it " +"with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:66 +msgid "diskdrake--smb3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:72 +msgid "diskdrake--smb4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask " +"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow " +"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The " +"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:84 +msgid "diskdrake--smb5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:3 +msgid "3D Desktop Effects" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drak3d.xml:5 +msgid "drak3d" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:10 +msgid "drak3d.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D " +"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by " +"default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:25 +msgid "Getting Started" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:27 +msgid "" +"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the " +"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can " +"start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:31 +msgid "" +"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you " +"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or " +"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/" +"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your " +"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of " +"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be " +"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</" +"guibutton> button to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:45 +msgid "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz " +"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in " +"for the changes to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:53 +msgid "" +"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz " +"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:59 +msgid "Troubleshooting" +msgstr "פתרון בעיות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:62 +msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop " +"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in " +"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:71 +msgid "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:75 +msgid "" +"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be " +"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login " +"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the " +"log in problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakauth.xml:9 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "אימות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakauth.xml:11 +msgid "drakauth" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakauth.xml:16 +msgid "drakauth.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the " +"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:25 +msgid "" +"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your " +"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so " +"and give information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:3 +msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in" +msgstr "הגדרת כניסה אוטומטית לחשבון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:6 +msgid "drakautologin" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:11 +msgid "drakautologin.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakautologin</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to " +"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without " +"asking for any password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good " +"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:22 +msgid "" +"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the " +"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:26 +msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</" +"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If " +"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible " +"to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by launching the " +"command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either " +"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to " +"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check " +"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if " +"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default " +"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakboot.xml:3 +msgid "Set up boot system" +msgstr "הגדרת אתחול המערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakboot.xml:5 +msgid "drakboot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:10 +msgid "drakboot--boot.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is " +"slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition " +"(ESP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:20 +msgid "drakboot--boot2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default " +"boot, etc.)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled \"Set up " +"boot system\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing " +"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if " +"using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, " +"Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question " +"of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the " +"<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you " +"are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any " +"modification can prevent your machine from booting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:46 +msgid "" +"In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is " +"installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common " +"to all operating systems installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:50 +msgid "" +"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set " +"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. " +"During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating " +"systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is made, the " +"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:57 +msgid "" +"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is " +"possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and " +"password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change " +"settings. The username is \"root\" and the password is the one chosen here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:63 +msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:66 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:68 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the " +"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was " +"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI " +"compatible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:73 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:75 +msgid "" +"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for " +"multicore processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual " +"processor and enable SMP." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</" +"guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:86 +msgid "" +"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two " +"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O " +"APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses " +"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful " +"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC " +"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message " +"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local " +"APIC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:97 +msgid "drakboot1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:101 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot " +"loader you chose." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:106 +msgid "You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:108 +msgid "" +"In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot " +"time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu " +"entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you " +"click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> " +"buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or " +"to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be " +"able to use these tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:118 +msgid "drakboot2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:122 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want " +"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For " +"example: Mageia3." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:126 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches " +"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:129 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the " +"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:133 en/drakboot.xml:160 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to " +"the kernel at boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this " +"entry by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:139 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> " +"file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref linkend=" +"\"draknetprofile\"/>, in the drop-down lists." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:147 +msgid "" +"You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in " +"Legacy mode and UEFI mode):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:150 +msgid "" +"In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> " +"displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:156 +msgid "drakboot3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:163 +msgid "" +"If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them " +"to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box " +"<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:167 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable " +"Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not " +"touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:175 +msgid "drakboot6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:180 +msgid "" +"Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable " +"unless chain loaded from another OS." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:184 +msgid "" +"To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub " +"Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:190 +msgid "drakboot4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:11 +msgid "Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:12 +msgid "drakbug_report" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by " +"doing <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, " +"but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be " +"several GBs large." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing " +"the unneeded parts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:26 +msgid "This command collects the following information on your system:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:29 +msgid "lspci" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:30 +msgid "pci_devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:31 +msgid "dmidecode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:32 +msgid "fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:33 +msgid "scsi" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:34 +msgid "/sys/bus/scsi/devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:35 +msgid "lsmod" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:36 +msgid "cmdline" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:37 +msgid "pcmcia: stab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:38 +msgid "usb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:39 +msgid "partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:40 +msgid "cpuinfo" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:41 +msgid "syslog" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:42 +msgid "Xorg.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:43 +msgid "monitor_full_edid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:44 +msgid "stage1.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:45 +msgid "ddebug.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:46 +msgid "install.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:47 +msgid "fstab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:48 +msgid "modprobe.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:49 +msgid "lilo.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:50 +msgid "grub: menu.lst" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:51 +msgid "grub: install.sh" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:52 +msgid "grub: device.map" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:53 +msgid "xorg.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:54 +msgid "urpmi.cfg" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:55 +msgid "modprobe.preload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:56 +msgid "sysconfig/i18n" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:57 +msgid "/proc/iomem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:58 +msgid "/proc/ioport" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:59 +msgid "mageia version" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:60 +msgid "rpm -qa" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:61 +msgid "df" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the time this help page was written, the \"syslog\" part of this " +"command's output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to " +"our switch to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the \"syslog\" " +"by doing (as root) <emphasis role=\"bold\"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</" +"emphasis>. If you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take " +"the last 5000 lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">journalctl -a | tail -n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "Mageia Bug Report Tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "drakbug" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakbug.xml:15 +msgid "drakbug.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Usually, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> starts " +"automatically when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, " +"after filing a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of " +"the information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:21 +msgid "" +"If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, " +"then please read <link xlink:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"How_to_report_a_bug_properly\">How to report a bug report properly</link> " +"before clicking on the \"Report\" button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:23 +msgid "" +"In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message " +"that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to " +"that existing report that you saw the bug, too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakclock.xml:3 +msgid "Manage date and time" +msgstr "ניהול תאריך ושעה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakclock.xml:5 +msgid "drakclock" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakclock.xml:10 +msgid "drakclock.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab " +"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time" +"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right " +"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:21 +msgid "It's a very simple tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:23 +msgid "" +"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. " +"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on " +"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month " +"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or " +"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:29 +msgid "" +"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</" +"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by " +"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time " +"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:34 +msgid "" +"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's " +"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, " +"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows " +"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see " +"your desktop environment settings for that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:40 +msgid "" +"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the " +"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the " +"nearest town." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they " +"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation " +"settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "Remove a connection" +msgstr "הסרת חיבור" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "drakconnect --del" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:8 +msgid "drakconnect--del.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then " +"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted " +"successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)" +msgstr "הגדרת מנשק רשת חדש (LAN, ISDN, ADSL ...)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:6 +msgid "drakconnect" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:11 +msgid "drakconnect.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much " +"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from " +"your access provider or your network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware " +"and provider you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:30 +msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162 +msgid "" +"The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one " +"to configure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167 +msgid "" +"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557 +msgid "Automatic IP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:62 +msgid "drakconnect5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572 +msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576 +msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581 +msgid "the DHCP client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585 +msgid "DHCP timeout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594 +msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599 +msgid "" +"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server " +"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. " +"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241 +msgid "" +"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection " +"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615 +msgid "Manual configuration" +msgstr "הגדרה ידנית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:115 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS " +"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no " +"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service " +"provider's website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:126 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need " +"this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:136 +msgid "drakconnect30.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:780 +msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:150 +msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:91 +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:95 en/draknetcenter.xml:138 +msgid "" +"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:158 +msgid "A new Cable modem connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:172 +msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:176 +msgid "None" +msgstr "כלום" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:180 +msgid "" +"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name " +"and password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers " +"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME " +"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:263 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not " +"need this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:273 +msgid "drakconnect32.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:287 +msgid "A new DSL connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:291 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380 +msgid "Select one of the protocols available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:307 +msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)" +msgstr "פרוטוקול הגדרת מארח באופן דינמי (DHCP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:311 +msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration" +msgstr "הגדרה ידנית של TCP/IP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:315 +msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:319 +msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" +msgstr "PPP מעל תשתית Ethernet (PPPoE)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:323 +msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)" +msgstr "פרוטוקול ערוץ נקודה לנקודה (PPTP)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:329 +msgid "Access settings" +msgstr "הגדרות גישה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678 +msgid "Account Login (user name)" +msgstr "שם משתמש (כניסה לחשבון)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682 +msgid "Account password" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:341 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:345 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:357 +msgid "A new ISDN connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706 +msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:365 +msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:369 +msgid "External ISDN modem" +msgstr "מודם ISDN חיצוני" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:375 +msgid "" +"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. " +"Select your card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:384 +msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:389 +msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:395 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is " +"asked for parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:402 +msgid "Connection name" +msgstr "שם התחברות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:406 +msgid "Phone number" +msgstr "מספר טלפון" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:410 +msgid "Login ID" +msgstr "שם משתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:418 +msgid "Authentication method" +msgstr "שיטת אימות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:424 +msgid "" +"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or " +"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:430 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by " +"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to " +"put:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:436 +msgid "Domain name" +msgstr "שם מתחם" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:440 +msgid "First and second DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:444 +msgid "" +"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you " +"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:452 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic " +"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the " +"IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:464 +msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:468 +msgid "" +"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for " +"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper " +"only if the other configuration methods did not work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:475 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that " +"the card has detected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:480 +msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:484 +msgid "drakconnect31.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:490 +msgid "Operating mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:494 +msgid "Managed" +msgstr "מנוהל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:497 +msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:503 +msgid "Ad-Hoc" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:506 +msgid "To configure direct connection between computers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:514 +msgid "Network Name (ESSID)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:518 +msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:523 +msgid "WPA/WPA2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:526 +msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:532 +msgid "WEP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:535 +msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:543 +msgid "Encryption key" +msgstr "מפתח הצפנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:545 +msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:552 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a " +"manual IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:561 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are " +"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. " +"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of " +"the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name " +"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be " +"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from " +"DHCP server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:589 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:608 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all " +"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:619 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:625 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers " +"website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:630 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the " +"period." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:644 +msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:648 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:653 +msgid "The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:658 +msgid "" +"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option " +"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:670 +msgid "Provide access settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:674 +msgid "Access Point Name" +msgstr "שם נקודת גישה (Access Point)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:694 +msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:702 +msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:710 +msgid "Manual choice" +msgstr "בחירה ידנית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:714 +msgid "Detected hardware, if any." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:720 +msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:724 +msgid "" +"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package " +"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:729 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked " +"for Dialup options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:736 +msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:740 +msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:744 +msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:748 +msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:752 +msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:756 +msgid "PAP/CHAP" +msgstr "PAP/CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:760 +msgid "Script-based" +msgstr "מבוסס תסריט (סקריפט)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:764 +msgid "PAP" +msgstr "PAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:768 +msgid "Terminal-based" +msgstr "מבוסס-מסוף" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:772 +msgid "CHAP" +msgstr "CHAP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:786 +msgid "Ending the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:788 +msgid "In the next step, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:792 +msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:796 +msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:800 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:804 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:809 +msgid "" +"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow " +"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch " +"automatically between access point according to the signal strength." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:816 +msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:820 +msgid "Metric (10 by default)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:824 +msgid "MTU" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:828 +msgid "Network Hotplugging" +msgstr "חיבור \"חם\" לרשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:832 +msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel" +msgstr "אפשור tunnel מ-IPv6 ל-IPv4" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:836 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start " +"immediately or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:841 +msgid "drakconnect9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:3 +msgid "Open a console as administrator" +msgstr "פתיחת מסוף כמנהל המערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:5 +msgid "drakconsole" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:10 +msgid "drakconsole.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a " +"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more " +"information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:5 +msgid "Manage disk partitions" +msgstr "ניהול מחיצות הכונן" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:7 +msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:12 +msgid "drakdiskBackup.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> " +"as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny " +"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a " +"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll " +"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</" +"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you " +"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:32 +msgid "drakdisk.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:36 +msgid "" +"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your " +"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, " +"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a " +"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</" +"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, " +"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called \"EFI " +"System Partition\" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it " +"contains all your different operating systems bootloaders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot " +"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition " +"must be unmounted first." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:56 +msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:58 +msgid "" +"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to " +"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button " +"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part " +"is selected" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:63 +msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:68 +msgid "drakdiskMountedPartition.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> " +"gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be " +"seen in the screenshot below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:78 +msgid "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakedm.xml:4 +msgid "Set up display manager" +msgstr "הגדרת מנהל ההפעלה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakedm.xml:5 +msgid "drakedm" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakedm.xml:9 +msgid "drakedm.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display " +"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available " +"on your system will be shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. " +"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a " +"lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3 +msgid "Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "הגדרת חומת־האש האישית שלך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5 +msgid "drakfirewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:10 +msgid "drakfirewall.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal " +"firewall\". It is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system " +"security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20 +msgid "" +"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming " +"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the " +"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection " +"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - " +"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable " +"the firewall, and only check the needed services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27 +msgid "" +"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on " +"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field " +"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these " +"examples :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32 +msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34 +msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37 +msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is " +"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:44 +msgid "drakfirewall2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) " +"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even " +"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature " +"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box " +"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second " +"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure " +"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards " +"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot " +"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be " +"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64 +msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:69 +msgid "drakfirewall3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:75 +msgid "drakfirewall4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the " +"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary " +"packages are downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & " +"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfont.xml:3 +msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts" +msgstr "ניהול, הוספה והסרת גופנים. ייבוא גופני חלונות (שם רשום)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfont.xml:6 +msgid "drakfont" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfont.xml:11 +msgid "drakfont.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It " +"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen " +"above shows:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:22 +msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:26 +msgid "a preview of the selected font." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:30 +msgid "some buttons explained here later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You " +"must have Microsoft Windows installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:43 +msgid "" +"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able " +"to use the fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">הסרה:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:48 +msgid "" +"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be " +"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the " +"documents that use them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:52 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>" +msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">ייבוא:</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The " +"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the " +"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when " +"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont " +"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:3 +msgid "Parental Controls" +msgstr "בקרת הורים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakguard.xml:5 +msgid "drakguard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakguard.xml:10 +msgid "drakguard.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">drakguard</emphasis> כמשתמש על (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</" +"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard " +"package (not installed by default)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:21 en/msecgui.xml:19 +msgid "Presentation" +msgstr "הצגה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to " +"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three " +"useful capabilities:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by " +"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can " +"only execute what you accept them to execute." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/" +"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To " +"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker " +"DansGuardian." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:49 +msgid "Configuring Parental controls" +msgstr "הגדרת בקרת הורים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, " +"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on " +"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel " +"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named " +"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by " +"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this " +"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will " +"then suggest you reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental " +"control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab " +"is opened." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the " +"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all " +"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have " +"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the " +"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are " +"not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an " +"user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to " +"remove him/her from the allowed users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:77 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed " +"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and " +"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time " +"window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:83 +msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab" +msgstr "לשונית רשימת הדחייה/ההתרה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:90 +msgid "Block Programs Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:92 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to " +"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the " +"applications you wish to block." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand " +"side will not be subject to acl blocking." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:9 +msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines" +msgstr "שיתוף הקישור לאינטרנט עם מחשבים אחרים ברשת מקומית" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakgw.xml:12 +msgid "drakgw" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:17 +msgid "drakgw.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:25 +msgid "Principles" +msgstr "עקרונות" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:29 +msgid "../drakgw-net.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a " +"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local " +"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to " +"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the " +"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card " +"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to " +"the Internet (2)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are " +"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:45 +msgid "Gateway wizard" +msgstr "אשף שער הגישה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:48 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">drakgw</emphasis> כמשתמש על (root)." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps " +"which are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this " +"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:60 +msgid "" +"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard " +"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that " +"what is proposed is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:66 +msgid "" +"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes " +"one, check that this is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask " +"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual " +"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:78 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to " +"specify the address of a DNS server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:84 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure " +"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:91 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, " +"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the " +"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:99 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to " +"printers and to share them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:104 +msgid "" +"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:109 +msgid "Configure the client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:111 +msgid "" +"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to " +"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address " +"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting " +"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is " +"using." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular " +"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the " +"gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:123 +msgid "Stop connection sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch " +"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:3 +msgid "Hosts definitions" +msgstr "הגדרת מארחים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:5 +msgid "drakhosts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:10 +msgid "drakhosts.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-" +"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to " +"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name " +"instead of the IP-address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:20 +msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:22 +msgid "" +"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window " +"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an " +"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:27 +msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:29 +msgid "" +"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the " +"same window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall" +msgstr "הגדרות מתקדמות למנשקי הרשת וחומת־האש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "drakinvictus" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:8 +msgid "drakinvictus.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:12 en/draknetcenter.xml:127 en/drakups.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:11 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:8 +msgid "Network Center" +msgstr "מרכז הרשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:9 +msgid "draknetcenter" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:13 +msgid "draknetcenter.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Network & Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network " +"Center\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21 +msgid "" +"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks " +"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, " +"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending " +"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its " +"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a " +"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, " +"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the " +"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows " +"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, " +"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not " +"connected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:34 +msgid "" +"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected " +"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</" +"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the " +"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either " +"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or " +"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to " +"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window " +"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in " +"particular)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:43 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:46 +msgid "draknetcenter1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:51 +msgid "The Monitor button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:54 +msgid "draknetcenter4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:57 +msgid "" +"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the " +"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is " +"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray " +"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:61 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the " +"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which " +"gives details about connection status." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</" +"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:70 +msgid "The Configure button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:71 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:74 +msgid "draknetcenter2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:77 +msgid "" +"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. " +"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> " +"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual " +"configuration may give better results." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:81 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks " +"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the " +"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are " +"available from your providers website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count " +"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in " +"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may " +"have to reconnect to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:89 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:" +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:94 en/draknetcenter.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:100 +msgid "draknetcenter5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:104 +msgid "Only the items not already seen above are explained." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:107 +msgid "draknetcenter3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:111 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access " +"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected. " +"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as " +"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:116 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118 +msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know these settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:119 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a " +"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA " +"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used " +"in private networks." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access " +"point while remaining connected to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:132 +msgid "draknetcenter6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:137 +msgid "The Advanced Settings button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:143 +msgid "draknetcenter7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:12 +msgid "Manage different network profiles" +msgstr "ניהול פרופילי רשת שונים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:14 en/draknetprofile.xml:46 +msgid "Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix " +"set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a " +"desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between " +"various network environments: having the system run in different network " +"environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given " +"network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each " +"time the network environment changes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:31 +msgid "Profiles" +msgstr "פרופילים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a " +"standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>\"network profile\"</" +"emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, defined for " +"a specific network environment. Each network profile has a <emphasis " +"role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes out of " +"system generation has the name <emphasis>\"default\"</emphasis>; when a new " +"profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all " +"already existing profile names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center " +"(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing profiles. " +"This GUI allows to" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:56 +msgid "" +"switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the " +"\"current profile\"," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:61 +msgid "create a new, additional profile," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:65 +msgid "delete a profile from the list of defined profiles." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:73 +msgid "Running Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:76 +msgid "Defining profiles, profile switching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:78 +msgid "" +"Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its " +"users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, " +"launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:86 +msgid "./draknetprofile_mcc.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & " +"Internet tab</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:98 +msgid "" +"launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:103 +msgid "select the \"Network & Internet\" tab," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:107 +msgid "" +"hit \"Manage different network profiles\" in the \"Personalize and Secure " +"your network\" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a " +"terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when standard-" +"output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - for " +"instance for debugging). Simply type:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:124 +msgid "<literal> draknetprofile </literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:130 +msgid "After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:136 +msgid "./draknetprofile_main.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:140 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of Draknetprofile</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:145 +msgid "" +"The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently " +"defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:152 +msgid "" +"\"Activate\" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as " +"the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:158 +msgid "\"New\" ... create a new profile;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:162 +msgid "" +"\"Delete\" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:167 +msgid "\"Quit\" ... exit from Draknetprofile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:171 +msgid "" +"Before hitting the \"Activate\" or the \"Delete\" button, you have to select " +"a profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the " +"target profile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:175 +msgid "" +"Hitting the \"New\" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can " +"type the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different " +"from any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise " +"copy of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the " +"current profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties " +"(modify the automatically created configuration) in a second, independent " +"action:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:188 +msgid "exit from Draknetprofile (hit the \"Quit\" button)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:192 +msgid "" +"back in the \"Network & Internet\" tab, you select the tab \"Set up a " +"new network interface (...)\" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:198 +msgid "" +"you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are " +"similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during " +"system generation - as documented in the <link linkend='drakconnect-" +"ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:206 +msgid "" +"The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the \"Advanced\" " +"button to make it visible. It should display the list of names of " +"Draknetprofile <emphasis role='bold'>\"modules\"</emphasis> (such as " +"\"network\", \"firewall\", \"urpmi\"), each with a check-button next to the " +"name; these check-buttons determine whether the properties controlled by " +"that module are included into the profile or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:217 +msgid "Using a system that has more than one profile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:219 +msgid "" +"In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user " +"interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the " +"bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you " +"will get a message like" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:230 +msgid "" +"<literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) roaming* </" +"literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:237 +msgid "" +"Type 1 or 2 to select the \"default\", respectively the \"roaming\" profile, " +"or carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk " +"(the profile that was active when the system had been shut down)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:242 +msgid "" +"Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens " +"that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a " +"profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This " +"problem is under investigation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:251 +msgid "Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:253 +msgid "" +"The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory " +"<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names " +"like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:257 +msgid "" +"The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file " +"<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:9 +msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS" +msgstr "שיתוף כוננים וספריות בעזרת NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknfs.xml:11 +msgid "draknfs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:16 +msgid "draknfs.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:24 +msgid "Prerequisites" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the " +"first time, it may display the following message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:33 +msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:42 +msgid "Main window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:44 +msgid "" +"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list " +"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a " +"configuration tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:50 +msgid "Modify entry" +msgstr "שינוי מובאה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched " +"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are " +"available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:58 +msgid "draknfs4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:64 +msgid "NFS Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The " +"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:72 +msgid "Host access" +msgstr "גישת מארח" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared " +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:77 +msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name " +"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard " +"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the " +"domain cs.foo.edu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all " +"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either " +"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:96 +msgid "User ID Mapping" +msgstr "מיפוי זהוי משתמש" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid " +"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client " +"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on " +"the server itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. " +"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids " +"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP " +"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID " +"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of " +"the anonymous account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:118 +msgid "Advanced options" +msgstr "הגדרות מתקדמות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests " +"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option " +"is on by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:124 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read " +"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any " +"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by " +"using this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:129 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from " +"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made " +"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:134 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can " +"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See " +"exports(5) man page for more details." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:176 +msgid "Menu entries" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:143 +msgid "So far the list has at least one entry." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:147 +msgid "draknfs5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:182 +msgid "File|Write conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:155 +msgid "Save the current configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:159 +msgid "NFS Server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:197 +msgid "" +"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:166 +msgid "NFS Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:204 +msgid "" +"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:10 +msgid "Proxy" +msgstr "שרת מתווך (Proxy)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:12 +msgid "drakproxy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:17 +msgid "drakproxy.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use " +"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net " +"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify " +"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:30 +msgid "" +"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a " +"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as " +"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control their complexity." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3 +msgid "Configure Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22 +msgid "" +"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as " +"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources " +"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button " +"below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a " +"USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media " +"used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new " +"packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the " +"media type CD-Rom)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called " +"i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether " +"your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They " +"don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both " +"the i586 and the x86_64 media." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:40 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" " +"id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:46 +msgid "The columns" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:48 +msgid "Column Enable:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with " +"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:54 +msgid "Column Update:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:56 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only " +"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, " +"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root " +"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62 +msgid "Column medium:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release " +"versions contain at least:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs " +"available supported by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs " +"which are not free" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there " +"might be patent claims in some countries." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:82 +msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the " +"this version of Mageia was released." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since " +"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium " +"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:97 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions " +"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests " +"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the " +"corrections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111 +msgid "The buttons on the right" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114 +msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116 +msgid "" +"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to " +"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since " +"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:121 +msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and " +"proxy)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories " +"contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the \"Add\" button " +"adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that " +"you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a " +"specific mirror, then add it by choosing \"Add a specific media mirror\" " +"from the drop-down \"File\" menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135 +msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list " +"in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same " +"release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will " +"be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:145 en/harddrake2.xml:64 +msgid "The menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:147 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:149 +msgid "" +"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and " +"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:152 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's " +"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the " +"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. " +"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose " +"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the " +"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by " +"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165 +msgid "drakrpmEditMedia2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:169 +msgid "" +"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very " +"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available " +"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:174 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:176 +msgid "" +"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that " +"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:181 +msgid "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:179 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a " +"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, " +"according to the medium type)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:187 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed" +"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to " +"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by " +"default-, update only, always or never)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:194 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:196 +msgid "" +"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate " +"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the " +"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</" +"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on " +"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:203 +msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:204 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:206 +msgid "" +"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it " +"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if " +"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:213 +msgid "" +"For more information about configuring the media, see <link ns2:href=" +"\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management\">the Mageia Wiki page</" +"link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:3 +msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:6 +msgid "draksambashare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:11 +msgid "draksambashare.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some " +"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure " +"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is " +"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the " +"resources of the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:28 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:30 +msgid "" +"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP " +"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with " +"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies " +"the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The " +"firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:41 +msgid "Wizard - Standalone server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:44 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold" +"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:43 +msgid "" +"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks " +"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are " +"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:52 +msgid "draksambashare0.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:56 +msgid "" +"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already " +"selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:60 +msgid "draksambashare1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the " +"access to the shared resources." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on " +"the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:72 +msgid "draksambashare2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:76 +msgid "Choose the security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the " +"resource" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for " +"each share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:90 +msgid "" +"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP " +"address or host name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:95 +msgid "draksambashare3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be " +"described in the Windows workstations." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:104 +msgid "draksambashare4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:108 +msgid "" +"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:113 +msgid "draksambashare5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:117 +msgid "" +"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the " +"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/" +"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:123 +msgid "draksambashare6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:129 +msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:133 +msgid "draksambashare13.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain " +"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is " +"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are " +"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the " +"security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:142 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and " +"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized " +"account repository is shared between (security) controllers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:151 +msgid "Declare a directory to share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:153 +msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:157 +msgid "draksambashare15.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:161 +msgid "" +"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</" +"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is " +"visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share name can not be " +"modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:168 +msgid "draksambashare16.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:178 +msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:184 +msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:189 +msgid "Samba server|Configure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:191 +msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:195 +msgid "Samba server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:202 +msgid "Samba Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:210 +msgid "Printers share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:212 +msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:216 +msgid "draksambashare17.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:214 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:58 en/rpmdrake.xml:163 en/rpmdrake.xml:173 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 en/rpmdrake.xml:193 en/rpmdrake.xml:203 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:238 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:222 +msgid "Samba users" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:227 +msgid "draksambashare18.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:224 +msgid "" +"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared " +"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref " +"linkend=\"userdrake\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksec.xml:3 +msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools" +msgstr "הגדרת אימות לכלים של Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksec.xml:6 +msgid "draksec" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:11 +msgid "draksec0.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:19 +msgid "" +"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks " +"usually done by the administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:22 +msgid "Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:27 +msgid "draksec.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in " +"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a " +"drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the " +"same MCC tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:43 +msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:53 +msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:11 +msgid "Snapshots" +msgstr "תמונות מערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12 +msgid "draksnapshot-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:18 +msgid "draksnapshot-config.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is available in MCC's " +"<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration tools</" +"guilabel> section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message " +"about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to " +"proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the " +"<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable Backups</" +"guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, <guilabel>Backup the " +"whole system</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to " +"the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and " +"files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the <guilabel>Exclude</" +"guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from the chosen " +"directories, that should <emphasis role=\"bold\">not</emphasis> be included " +"in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the " +"<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted " +"USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis role=\"bold\">/run/media/" +"your_user_name/</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:45 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksound.xml:3 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות קול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksound.xml:4 +msgid "draksound" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:8 +msgid "draksound.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:13 +msgid "" +"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and " +"troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you " +"change the sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound " +"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting " +"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio " +"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:20 +msgid "" +"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it " +"enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It " +"is also recommended to leave it enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with " +"fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this " +"before asking the community for help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an " +"obvious button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:30 +msgid "draksound1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring" +msgstr "הגדרת אל־פסק למעקב אחר צריכת החשמל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "drakups" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakups.xml:8 +msgid "drakups.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:3 +msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:6 +msgid "drakvpn" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:11 +msgid "drakvpn1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure " +"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local " +"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the " +"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is " +"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the " +"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:30 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "הגדרות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:32 +msgid "" +"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which " +"protocol is used for your virtual private network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:35 +msgid "Then give your connection a name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:37 +msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:42 +msgid "For Cisco VPN" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:48 +msgid "drakvpn3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the " +"first time the tool is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:59 +msgid "drakvpn7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you " +"received from the network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:64 +msgid "Advanced parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:68 +msgid "drakvpn8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:72 +msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:76 +msgid "" +"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN " +"connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:79 +msgid "" +"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network " +"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect " +"to this VPN." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "Configure webserver" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_apache2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"web server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:15 +msgid "What is a web server?" +msgstr "מהו שרת רשת?" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be " +"accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the web server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:34 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:49 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:34 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:38 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:38 +msgid "Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:49 +msgid "Server User Module" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:56 +msgid "Allows users to create their own sites." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:60 +msgid "User web directory name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will " +"display it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:71 +msgid "Server Document Root" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:78 +msgid "Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:82 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:83 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:71 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:144 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:105 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "סיכום" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:89 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:91 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:78 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:153 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:112 +msgid "" +"Take a second to check these options, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:93 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:82 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:173 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:116 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "סיום" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:96 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:100 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:89 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:183 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:123 +msgid "You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DNS" +msgstr "הגדרת DNS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard bind" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_bind.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DHCP" +msgstr "הגדרת DHCP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:5 +msgid "drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:10 +msgid "drakwizard_dhcp.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net " +"interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should " +"be installed before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:26 +msgid "What is DHCP?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a " +"standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically " +"configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet " +"communication. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:35 +msgid "Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:37 +msgid "Welcome to the DHCP server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:45 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:54 +msgid "Selecting Adaptor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:58 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for " +"which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:68 +msgid "Select IP range" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:76 +msgid "" +"Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want " +"the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to " +"some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:87 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:96 +msgid "Hold on..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:100 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and " +"change things around." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:109 +msgid "Hours later..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:113 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:121 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:87 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:189 +msgid "What is done" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:125 +msgid "Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:134 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from <code>/usr/share/" +"wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and adding the new " +"parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:140 +msgid "<code>hname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:144 +msgid "<code>dns</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:148 +msgid "net" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:152 +msgid "ip" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:156 +msgid "<code>mask</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:160 +msgid "<code>rng1</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:164 +msgid "<code>rng2</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:168 +msgid "<code>dname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:172 +msgid "<code>gateway</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:176 +msgid "<code>tftpserverip</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:180 +msgid "<code>dhcpd_interface</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:186 +msgid "" +"Also modifying Webmin configuration file <code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</" +"code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:191 +msgid "Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code>" +msgstr "<code>dhcpd</code> מופעל מחדש." + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:10 +msgid "Configure time" +msgstr "הגדרת זמן" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:19 +msgid "drakwizard_ntp.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> purpose is to set the " +"time of your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed " +"by default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base " +"packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:32 +msgid "Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:36 +msgid "" +"After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three " +"time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice " +"because this server always points to available time servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:43 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:49 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata><info> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:51 +msgid "<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:50 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:63 +msgid "" +"The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you " +"arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it " +"using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, " +"click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It " +"may take a while and you finally get this screen below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:78 +msgid "Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:89 +msgid "This tool executes the following steps:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:93 +msgid "Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to <code>/etc/sysconfig/" +"clock.orig</code> and <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to <code>/etc/ntp/" +"step-tickers.orig</code>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of " +"servers;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server " +"name;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and <code>ntpd</" +"code> services;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:119 +msgid "" +"Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "Configure FTP" +msgstr "הגדרת FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_proftpd.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>FTP</acronym> server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:15 +msgid "What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:17 +msgid "" +"File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network " +"protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a " +"<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:49 +msgid "Server Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email " +"complaints too and whether to allow root login access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:60 +msgid "Server Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> " +"(File eXchange Protocol)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:10 +msgid "Configure proxy" +msgstr "הגדרת שרת מתווך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:17 +msgid "drakwizard_squid.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed " +"before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:29 +msgid "What is a proxy server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:31 +msgid "" +"A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts " +"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:40 +msgid "Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:42 +msgid "Welcome to the proxy server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:50 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:60 +msgid "Selecting the proxy port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:69 +msgid "" +"Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:74 +msgid "Set Memory and Disk Usage" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:78 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:88 +msgid "Select Network Access Control" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:92 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Set visibility to local network or world, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:102 +msgid "Grant Network Access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:106 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:111 +msgid "Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:116 +msgid "Use Upper Level Proxy Server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:120 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:125 +msgid "Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:130 +msgid "Upper Level Proxy URL and Port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:134 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:148 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:158 +msgid "Start during boot?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:162 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:168 +msgid "" +"Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:177 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:193 +msgid "Installing the package squid if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:197 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf." +"orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:202 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from <code>squid.conf." +"default</code> and adding the new parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:208 +msgid "<code>cache_dir</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:212 +msgid "<code>localnet</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:216 +msgid "cache_mem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:220 +msgid "http_port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:224 +msgid "" +"<code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:229 +msgid "<code>cache_peer</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:233 +msgid "<code>visible_hostname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:239 +msgid "Restarting <code>squid.</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration" +msgstr "הגדרת תוכנת הרקע OpenSSH" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_sshd.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16 +msgid "What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data " +"communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and " +"other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, " +"via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client " +"(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, " +"respectively). (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:22 +msgid "Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:24 +msgid "Welcome to the Open SSH wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:28 +msgid "Select Type of Configure Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:31 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or <guilabel>Newbie</" +"guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:39 +msgid "General Options" +msgstr "אפשרויות כלליות" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:42 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:50 +msgid "Authentication Methods" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:53 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, " +"then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:61 +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Choose logging facility and level of output, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:72 +msgid "Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:75 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:79 +msgid "Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:83 +msgid "User Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:86 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:90 +msgid "" +"Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:94 +msgid "Compression and Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:97 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:101 +msgid "" +"Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:108 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:119 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them" +msgstr "ניהול שירותי המערכת על ידי הפעלתם או ניטרולם" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:4 +msgid "drakxservices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:8 +msgid "drakxservices.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:10 +msgid "Hardware configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:12 +msgid "harddrake2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:17 +msgid "harddrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of " +"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job " +"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command " +"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-" +"lst</code> package." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:31 +msgid "The window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:33 +msgid "The window is divided in two columns." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:35 +msgid "" +"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are " +"grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a " +"category. Each device can be selected in this column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The right column displays information about the selected device. The " +"<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information " +"about the content of the fields." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:43 +msgid "" +"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are " +"available at the bottom of the right column:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to " +"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must " +"used by experts only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:54 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can " +"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:68 +msgid "" +"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to " +"enable automatic detection:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:73 +msgid "modem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:77 +msgid "Jaz devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:81 +msgid "Zip parallel devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:83 +msgid "" +"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check " +"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will " +"be operational the next time this tool is started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7 +msgid "keyboarddrake" +msgstr "מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake)" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:12 +msgid "keyboarddrake.png" +msgstr "keyboarddrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" +"ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה, באמצעות כתיבת <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">keyboarddrake</emphasis>as root." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19 +msgid "" +"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you " +"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. " +"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found " +"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled " +"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"." +msgstr "" +"כלי מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake)<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> עוזר " +"לך בהגדרת הפריסה הבסיסית למקלדת שבה ברצונך להשתמש ב־Mageia. הוא משפיע על " +"פריסת המקלדת עבור כל המשתמשים במערכת. ניתן למצוא אותו במקטע החומרה של מרכז " +"הבקרה של Mageia בשם \"הגדרת עכבר ומקלדת\"." + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29 +msgid "Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "פריסת מקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed " +"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each " +"layout should be used for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37 +msgid "Keyboard Type" +msgstr "סוג מקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are " +"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:10 +msgid "Manage localization for your system" +msgstr "ניהול התאמה למיקום של המערכת שלך" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/localedrake.xml:13 +msgid "localedrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/localedrake.xml:18 +msgid "localedrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the " +"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage " +"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can " +"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate " +"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:34 +msgid "" +"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected " +"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to " +"countries not listed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:38 +msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input " +"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, " +"Korean, etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:48 +msgid "" +"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so " +"users should not need to configure it manually." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions " +"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another " +"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:3 +msgid "View and search system logs" +msgstr "עיון וחיפוש ברישומי מערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/logdrake.xml:5 +msgid "logdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:10 +msgid "logdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</" +"guilabel>\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:22 +msgid "To do a search in the logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do " +"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) to search in " +"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to " +"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month " +"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>" +"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the " +"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is " +"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia " +"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are " +"updated each time a configuration is modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:43 +msgid "To configure a mail alert" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and " +"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</" +"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure " +"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running " +"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. " +"(See screenshot above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The following services can be watched :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:59 +msgid "Webmin Service" +msgstr "שירות Webmin" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:63 +msgid "Postfix Mail Server" +msgstr "שרת הדוא\"ל של Postfix" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:67 +msgid "FTP Server" +msgstr "שרת FTP" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:71 +msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server" +msgstr "שרת WWW של APACHI" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:75 +msgid "SSH Server" +msgstr "שרת SSH" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:79 +msgid "Samba Server" +msgstr "שרת סמבה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:83 +msgid "Xinetd Service" +msgstr "שירות Xinetd " + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:87 +msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:91 +msgid "logdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider " +"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows " +"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone " +"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value " +"to 3 times the number of processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the " +"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local " +"or on the Internet)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Display Available NFS And SMB Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:11 +msgid "lsnetdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lsnetdrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Documentation team.</link> Thanking you in " +"advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:3 +msgid "Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:6 +msgid "lspcidrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:10 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lspcidrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line. It will give some more information if used under " +"root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, " +"PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst " +"packages to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:20 +msgid "lspcidrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it " +"is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:31 +msgid "Information about the graphic card;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:33 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:35 +msgid "Information about the network" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:37 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:39 +msgid "-i to ignore case distinctions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:41 +msgid "" +"In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for " +"lspcidrake and the -i option for grep." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:46 +msgid "lspcidrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is " +"called <emphasis role=\"bold\">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3 +msgid "Software Packages Update" +msgstr "עדכון חבילות תוכנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5 +msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:10 +msgid "MageiaUpdate.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</" +"emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:20 +msgid "" +"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with drakrpm-" +"editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are " +"prompted to do so." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:25 +msgid "" +"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists " +"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by " +"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the " +"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:30 +msgid "" +"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of " +"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title " +"means you can click to drop down a text." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:38 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:21 +msgid "MageiaUpdate1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35 +msgid "" +"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by " +"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/" +"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "אתחול" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-boot.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot " +"steps. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19 +msgid "Configure boot steps" +msgstr "הגדרות שלבי האתחול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:12 en/MCC.xml:4 +msgid "Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "מרכז הבקרה של Mageia" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:14 +msgid "The tools to configure the Mageia system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:17 +msgid "../mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:21 en/MCC.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:24 en/MCC.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" +"המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href=\"http://www.calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</" +"link> שפותחה על ידי <link ns6:href=\"http://www.neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:26 en/MCC.xml:11 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4 +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "חומרה" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-hardware.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your " +"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20 +msgid "Manage your hardware" +msgstr "ניהול חומרה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34 +msgid "Configure graphics" +msgstr "הגדרות גרפיקה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48 +msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard" +msgstr "הגדרות עכבר ומקלדת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61 +msgid "Configure printing and scanning" +msgstr "הגדרות הדפסה וסריקה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), " +"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58 +msgid "Others" +msgstr "שונות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3 +msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to " +"choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was " +"installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be " +"selected in the big right panel." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8 +msgid "" +"The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10 +msgid "" +"The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in " +"any of the MCC tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool " +"screens." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:14 +msgid "" +"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on " +"the \"Search\" tab in the left column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17 +msgid "Local disks" +msgstr "כוננים מקומיים" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:11 +msgid "mcc-localdisks.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your " +"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17 +msgid "Network Services" +msgstr "שרותי רשת" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networkservices.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if " +"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose " +"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or " +"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4 +msgid "Network Sharing" +msgstr "שיתופי רשת" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networksharing.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and " +"directories. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17 +msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares" +msgstr "הגדרות שיתופי וינדוז" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and " +"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22 +msgid "Configure NFS shares" +msgstr "הגדרות שיתופי NFS" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27 +msgid "Configure WebDAV shares" +msgstr "הגדרות שיתופי WebDAV" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:3 +msgid "Network and Internet" +msgstr "רשת ואינטרנט" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:8 +msgid "mcc-network.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link " +"below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:18 +msgid "Manage your network devices" +msgstr "הגדרות התקני רשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:36 +msgid "Personalize and Secure your network" +msgstr "הגדרות פרטיות ואבטחה ברשת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:39 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:43 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:47 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:51 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:61 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "הגדרות אבטחה" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-security.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a " +"link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, " +"permissions and audit</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:37 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17 +msgid "Sharing" +msgstr "שיתוף" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-sharing.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only " +"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can " +"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link " +"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:3 +msgid "System" +msgstr "מערכת" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:7 +msgid "mcc-system.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:10 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration " +"tools. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:14 +msgid "Manage system services" +msgstr "הגדרות שירותי המערכת" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:22 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:28 +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "התאמה למקום" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:30 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:39 +msgid "Administration tools" +msgstr "כלי ניהול" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:44 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3 +msgid "Configure updates frequency" +msgstr "הגדרת תדירות העדכונים" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5 +msgid "mgaapplet-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:10 +msgid "mgaapplet-config.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</" +"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates " +"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject" +"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for " +"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The " +"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)" +msgstr "הגדרת התקן הצבעה (עכבר, לוח מגע)" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:6 +msgid "mousedrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:11 +msgid "mousedrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by " +"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse " +"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any " +"PS/2 & USB mice\" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is " +"immediately taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:3 +msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/msecgui.xml:5 +msgid "msecgui" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:13 +msgid "msecgui.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"msecgui<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is a graphic user interface " +"for msec that allows to configure your system security according to two " +"approaches:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:28 +msgid "" +"It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to " +"make it more secure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn " +"you if something seems dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:38 +msgid "" +"msec uses the concept of \"security levels\" which are intended to configure " +"a set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or " +"enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your " +"own customised security levels." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:45 +msgid "Overview tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:47 +msgid "See the screenshot above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a " +"button on the right side to configure them:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:59 +msgid "Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:64 +msgid "msec itself with some information:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:68 +msgid "enabled or not" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:72 +msgid "the configured Base security level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:76 +msgid "" +"the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report " +"and another button to execute the checks just now." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:86 +msgid "Security settings tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:88 +msgid "" +"A click on the second tab or on the Security <guibutton>Configure</" +"guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:94 +msgid "msecgui2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:100 +msgid "Basic security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security levels:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:106 +msgid "" +"After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab " +"allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then " +"in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The " +"following levels are available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you " +"do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on " +"your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or " +"constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only " +"if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system " +"vulnerable to attack." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:122 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">standard</emphasis>. This is the default " +"configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It " +"constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which " +"detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory " +"permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec " +"versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:131 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when " +"you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts " +"system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to " +"the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and " +"5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, " +"such as the <emphasis role=\"bold\">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"bold\">netbook</emphasis> " +"levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure system security according to " +"the most common use cases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:149 +msgid "" +"The last two levels called <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_daily </emphasis> " +"and <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security " +"levels but rather tools for periodic checks only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:156 +msgid "" +"These levels are saved in <filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></" +"filename>. You can define your own customised security levels, saving them " +"into specific files called <filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed " +"into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised or more secure system " +"configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:165 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default " +"level settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:170 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security alerts:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:173 +msgid "" +"If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email to:</" +"guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent by " +"local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You " +"can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail " +"and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive " +"the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to " +"enable it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:182 +msgid "" +"It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to " +"immediately inform the security administrator of possible security problems. " +"If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs files " +"available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:190 +msgid "" +"Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer " +"security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change " +"any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in <filename>/" +"etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains the current " +"security level name and the list of all the modifications done to the " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:199 +msgid "System security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:201 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a " +"description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side " +"column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:207 +msgid "msecgui3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:211 +msgid "" +"To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see " +"screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the " +"actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be " +"selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:219 +msgid "msecgui11.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:224 +msgid "" +"Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration " +"using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you " +"have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before " +"saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:232 +msgid "msecgui10.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:238 +msgid "Network security" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:240 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:245 +msgid "msecgui4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:251 +msgid "Periodic checks tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:253 +msgid "" +"Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of " +"security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:257 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency " +"if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is " +"checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:264 +msgid "msecgui5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:270 +msgid "Exceptions tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:272 +msgid "" +"Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In " +"these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab " +"allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert " +"messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot " +"below shows four exceptions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:280 +msgid "msecgui6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:284 +msgid "" +"To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:289 +msgid "msecgui7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:293 +msgid "" +"Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called " +"<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the <guilabel>Exception</" +"guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is obviously not definitive, " +"you can either delete it using the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of " +"the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> tab or modify it with a double clicK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:303 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "הרשאות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:304 +msgid "" +"This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and " +"enforcement." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:306 +msgid "" +"Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, " +"secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security level. " +"You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them into " +"specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed into " +"the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is " +"also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission " +"you want. Current configuration is stored in <filename>/etc/security/msec/" +"perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the list of all the modifications " +"done to the permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:318 +msgid "msecgui8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:321 +msgid "" +"Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You " +"can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the " +"owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a " +"given rule:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:327 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the " +"defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message " +"if not, but does not change anything." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:333 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the " +"permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the " +"permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:337 +msgid "" +"For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:339 +msgid "" +"To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button " +"and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in " +"the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:345 +msgid "msecgui9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:348 +msgid "" +"Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do " +"not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the " +"menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed " +"the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:353 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the " +"configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:356 +msgid "" +"Changes in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permission tab</emphasis> (or " +"directly in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first " +"periodic check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately " +"into account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You " +"can use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will " +"be changed by msecperms." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:363 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file " +"manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked " +"in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will " +"write the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the " +"configuration of the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:4 +msgid "Other Mageia Tools" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:7 +msgid "" +"There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia " +"Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the " +"next pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:11 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug_report\"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lsnetdrake\"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:29 +msgid "And more tools?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6 +msgid "rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:11 +msgid "rpmdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, " +"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the " +"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online " +"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official " +"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages " +"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only " +"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by " +"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed " +"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries " +"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names " +"included in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35 +msgid "" +"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend=" +"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><important><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43 +msgid "rpmdrake8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for " +"the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake " +"will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up " +"window : <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the above message " +"annoys you and you have a good internet connection without too strict " +"download limit, it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online " +"repositories thanks to <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more " +"packages, and allow to update your installed packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The main parts of the screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:60 +msgid "rpmdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:67 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first " +"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical " +"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their " +"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, " +"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who " +"probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading " +"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge " +"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </" +"firstterm>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the " +"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and " +"not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their " +"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included " +"in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:105 +msgid "" +"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword " +"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and " +"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" " +"box ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and " +"sub categories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:125 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:127 +msgid "" +"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete " +"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It " +"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the " +"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:137 +msgid "The status column" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by " +"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A " +"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium " +"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is " +"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or " +"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:155 +msgid "Icon" +msgstr "סמל" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:157 +msgid "Legend" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:165 +msgid "../rpmdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:169 +msgid "This package is already installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:175 +msgid "../rpmdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:179 +msgid "This package will be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:185 +msgid "../rpmdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:189 +msgid "This package cannot be modified" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:195 +msgid "../rpmdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199 +msgid "This package is an update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:205 +msgid "../rpmdrake6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:209 +msgid "This package will be uninstalled" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:147 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:215 +msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219 +msgid "" +"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status " +"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking " +"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:227 +msgid "" +"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange " +"with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when " +"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:235 +msgid "The dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:240 +msgid "rpmdrake7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:245 +msgid "" +"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They " +"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an " +"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected " +"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It " +"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed " +"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a " +"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to " +"install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Set up scanner" +msgstr "הגדרת סורק" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11 +msgid "scannerdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "התקנה" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing " +"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. " +"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a " +"remote computer or to access remote scanners." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following " +"message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-" +"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:44 +msgid "scannerdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see " +"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, " +"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner " +"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannersharing\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its " +"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new " +"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a " +"scanner manually</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the " +"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:69 +msgid "scannerdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79 +msgid "" +"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported " +"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums." +"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87 +msgid "Choose port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:91 +msgid "scannerdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</" +"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, " +"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen " +"similar to the one below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104 +msgid "" +"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:108 +msgid "scannerdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117 +msgid "Scannersharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:122 +msgid "scannerdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be " +"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also " +"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on " +"this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or " +"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on " +"this computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted " +"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:143 +msgid "scannerdrake6.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149 +msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:153 +msgid "scannerdrake7.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote " +"machines." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:164 +msgid "scannerdrake8.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170 +msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:175 +msgid "scannerdrake9.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181 +msgid "" +"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool " +"offers to do it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184 +msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive " +"\"net\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193 +msgid "" +"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</" +"emphasis> to be started on boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278 +msgid "Specifics" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205 +msgid "Hewlett-Packard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207 +msgid "" +"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> " +"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow " +"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214 +msgid "Epson" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/" +"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must " +"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict " +"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be " +"ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231 +msgid "Extra installation steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234 +msgid "" +"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref " +"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra " +"steps to correctly configure your scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded " +"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, " +"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the " +"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you " +"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241 +msgid "" +"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at " +"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/" +"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250 +msgid "" +"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know " +"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://" +"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15 +msgid "Software Management" +msgstr "ניהול תוכנה" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/software-management.xml:10 +msgid "software-management.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. " +"Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:17 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media " +"sources for install and update</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8 +msgid "Install and configure a printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11 +msgid "system-config-printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:16 +msgid "system-config-printer.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link " +"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration " +"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia " +"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer " +"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu " +"and openSUSE." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30 +msgid "" +"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the " +"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-" +"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34 +msgid "" +"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> " +"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure " +"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/" +">." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42 +msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45 +msgid "task-printing-server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47 +msgid "task-printing-hp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50 +msgid "" +"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of " +"dependencies are needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53 +msgid "" +"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to " +"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a " +"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a " +"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window " +"will also attempt to configure a network printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61 +msgid "Automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63 +msgid "" +"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the " +"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next" +"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be " +"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known " +"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the " +"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72 +msgid "No automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:76 +msgid "printer3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80 +msgid "" +"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window " +"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86 +msgid "Select printer from database" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92 +msgid "provide PPD file" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98 +msgid "search for a driver to download" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer " +"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one " +"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have " +"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one " +"which know to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110 +msgid "Complete the installation process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112 +msgid "" +"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will " +"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is " +"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of " +"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After " +"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available " +"printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121 +msgid "Network printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or " +"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to " +"another workstation that serves as printserver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed " +"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same " +"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134 +msgid "" +"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or " +"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a " +"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label " +"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a " +"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it " +"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters " +"after \"HWaddr\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142 +msgid "" +"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to " +"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, " +"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find " +"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu " +"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it " +"says \"host\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149 +msgid "" +"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a " +"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the " +"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find " +"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160 +msgid "Network printing protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162 +msgid "" +"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as " +"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network " +"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is " +"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers " +"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-" +"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can " +"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/" +"net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is " +"not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172 +msgid "" +"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the " +"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change " +"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be " +"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is " +"the same as above." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:180 +msgid "printer5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184 +msgid "The other protocols are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can " +"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by " +"some ADSL-routers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, " +"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be " +"defined. By default, the port 631 is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but " +"with TLS secured protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be " +"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using LPD." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a " +"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226 +msgid "" +"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form " +"the URI:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231 +msgid "Appsocket" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233 +msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237 +msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239 +msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241 +msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245 +msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247 +msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251 +msgid "" +"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups." +"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256 +msgid "Device Properties" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258 +msgid "" +"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to " +"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your " +"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</" +"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which " +"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, " +"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268 +msgid "Troubleshoot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270 +msgid "" +"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by " +"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273 +msgid "" +"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</" +"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280 +msgid "" +"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in " +"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:" +"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check " +"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is " +"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo " +"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the " +"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool " +"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works " +"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date " +"drivers or for more recent devices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294 +msgid "" +"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/" +"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by " +"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298 +msgid "" +"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304 +msgid "" +"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the " +"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</" +"link>. The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</" +"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-" +"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management " +"of the printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311 +msgid "" +"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner " +"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't " +"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this " +"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the " +"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, " +"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory " +"card which is appeared in the /media folder." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321 +msgid "" +"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL " +"protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326 +msgid "" +"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</" +"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package " +"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be " +"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages " +"according to your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332 +msgid "" +"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a " +"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338 +msgid "" +"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9 +msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings" +msgstr "יבוא מסמכים והגדרות מ־Windows" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12 +msgid "transfugdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:17 +msgid "transfugdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labeled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings " +"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark " +"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered" +"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same " +"computer as the Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake " +"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some " +"explanation about the tool and import options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of " +"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to " +"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and " +"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account " +"than yours own." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:51 +msgid "transfugdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of " +"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed " +"incorrectly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications " +"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For " +"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not " +"use such accounts for the import purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import " +"documents:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:80 +msgid "transfugdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</" +"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to " +"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the document import method choosing press " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method " +"to import bookmarks:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:95 +msgid "transfugdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112 +msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:116 +msgid "transfugdrake4.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the " +"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:128 +msgid "transfugdrake5.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/userdrake.xml:11 +msgid "Users and Groups" +msgstr "משתמשים וקבוצות" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/userdrake.xml:13 +msgid "userdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:18 +msgid "userdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labelled \"Manage users on system\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this " +"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings " +"(ID, shell, ...)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in " +"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the " +"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:37 +msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:41 +msgid "userdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the " +"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything " +"or nothing as well!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:49 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. " +"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, " +"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower " +"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn " +"orange and then green as the password strength improves." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure " +"you entered what you intended to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that " +"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options " +"are Bash, Dash and Sh." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if " +"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new " +"user as the only member (this may be edited)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:70 +msgid "" +"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately " +"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific " +"group ID." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:78 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given " +"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:87 +msgid "userdrake2.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:91 +msgid "" +"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. " +"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary " +"accounts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long " +"as the account is locked." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:98 +msgid "It is also possible to change the icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:100 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an " +"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his " +"password periodically." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:106 +msgid "userdrake3.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups " +"that the user is a member of." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:114 +msgid "" +"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be " +"effective until his/her next login." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the " +"group name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the " +"users who are members of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:126 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</" +"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home " +"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been " +"created for the user, it will be deleted as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:133 +msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:136 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:138 +msgid "" +"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to " +"refresh the display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:141 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is " +"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total " +"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to " +"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories " +"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, " +"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest " +"account</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the graphical server" +msgstr "הגדרת שרת גרפי" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:5 +msgid "XFdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:10 +msgid "XFdrake.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</" +"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the " +"capital letters." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the " +"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:24 +msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:26 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server " +"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example " +"one with a proprietary driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by " +"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical " +"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> " +"Xorg</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most " +"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while " +"in your Desktop Environment." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - " +"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing " +"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to " +"use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for example)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:53 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and " +"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor " +"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the " +"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the " +"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:69 +msgid "XFdrake1.png" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>When you change the color depth, " +"a multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview " +"of what the selected color depth looks like." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another " +"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card " +"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to " +"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or " +"select an uncomfortable setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for " +"another one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and " +"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:92 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking " +"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the " +"graphical environment doesn't work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a " +"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use " +"XFdrake's text version." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want " +"to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is " +"right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:107 +msgid "Options:" +msgstr "אפשרויות:" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-" +"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X " +"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:116 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable " +"three specific features depending on the graphic card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:121 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, " +"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</" +"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be " +"unchecked for a server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask " +"you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the " +"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect " +"and reconnect to activate the new configuration." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ffe5d9e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>מרכז הבקרה של Mageia</title> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The tools to configure the Mageia system</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63525172 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MCC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>מרכז הבקרה של Mageia</title> + <cover> + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>המדריך הזה הופק בעזרת <link ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco +CMS</link> שפותחה על ידי <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5c9f502 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/MageiaUpdate.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="MageiaUpdate"> + <info> + <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">עדכון חבילות תוכנה</title> + + <subtitle>MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management.</emphasis></para> + + <para><note> + <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with +drakrpm-editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you +are prompted to do so.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists +those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by +default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the +<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process.</para> + + <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of +the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title +means you can click to drop down a text.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by +displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> +. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike.</para> + </note></para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68eb0372 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/XFdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">הגדרת שרת גרפי</title> + + <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the +graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> +as root. Mind the capital letters.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <para/> + + <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server +configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example +one with a proprietary driver.</para> + + <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by +manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical +order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> +Xorg</guilabel>.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most +graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while +in your Desktop Environment.</para> + + <para>If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - +<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing +Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para> + </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to +use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for +example).</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para> + + <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and +you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor +isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the +<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the +colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>When you change the color depth, a +multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview +of what the selected color depth looks like.</para> + + <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another +one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card +and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to +set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or +select an uncomfortable setting.</para> + + <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for +another one.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and +restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.</para> + </note></para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking +on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the +graphical environment doesn't work.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a +text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use +XFdrake's text version.</para> + </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want +to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is +right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <title>אפשרויות:</title> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable +Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to +restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable +three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, +<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon +booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it +may be unchecked for a server.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask +you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the +previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect +and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc5044db --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--dav.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="diskdrake--dav" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של WebDAV</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure +WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a +protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it +appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a +WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV +server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Creating a new entry</title> + + <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if +any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new +entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para> + + <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue +with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the +<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct +it, if needed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount +point.</para> + + <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other +options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the +access.</para> + + <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button +<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your +new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you +are asked whether or not to save the modifications in +<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the +remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for +one-time usage, do not save it.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cd783828 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--fileshare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <info> + <!--2079.07.07 apb: Corrected syntax for userdrake link. --> +<title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">שיתוף מחיצות הכונן שלך</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This simple tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you, the +administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home +subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have +computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para> + + <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled +"Share your hard disk partitions".</para> + + <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to +share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No +sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on +<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on +<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for +the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their +directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically +created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para> + + <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you +choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. +Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on +the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both +Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any +required packages will be installed if necessary.</para> + + <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In +this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows +you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare +group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, +then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the +fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information +about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend="userdrake"/></para> + + <note> + <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and +reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account.</para> + </note> + + <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her +file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers +have this facility.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f56690fd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--nfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפות של NFS</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <para>.</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare some +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix +systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at +boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session +for a user with tools such as file browsers.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers +which share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the +shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have +to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and +change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After +mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, +a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab +modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the +network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file +browser, for example in Dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18366657 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--removable.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="diskdrake--removable"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD/DVD burner</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is found under the tab Local +disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable +hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). </para> + + <para>Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. </para> + + <para>At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and +the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change +them. Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> +button. </para> + + <section> + <title>נקודת עיגון</title> + + <para>Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>אפשרויות</title> + + <para>Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>user/nouser</title> + + <para>user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this +option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is +the only one who can umount it. </para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d75d6d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/diskdrake--smb.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="diskdrake--smb" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">גישה לכוננים וספריות משותפים של Windows (סמבה)</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle> + + </info> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare which +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) +systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared +directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with +tools such as file browsers.</para> + + <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of +available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who +share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the +list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you +have to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount +button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the +<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to +connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it +with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask +"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow +directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The +new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in +dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24b881b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drak3d.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">3D Desktop Effects</title> + + <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> lets you manage the 3D +desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by +default.</para> + </section> + + <section annotations="center"> + <title>Getting Started</title> + + <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the +package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can +start.</para> + + <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you +can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or +<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a +composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special +effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn +it on.</para> + + <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of +Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be +installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz +Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in +for the changes to take effect.</para> + + <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz +Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>פתרון בעיות</title> + + <section> + <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title> + + <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop +but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in +screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be +prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login +with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the +log in problem.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9968ec8c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakauth.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">אימות</title> + + <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakauth.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakauth-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the +manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para> + + <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your +computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so +and give information about that.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d5003bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakautologin.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakautologin"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakautologin-ti1">הגדרת כניסה אוטומטית לחשבון</title> + + <subtitle>drakautologin</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakautologin-im1" fileref="drakautologin.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakautologin</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to automatically +login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any +password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good idea when there +is only one user like to be using the machine.</para> + + <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the +Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para> + + <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para> + + <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system +starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the +boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be +possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by +launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'.</para> + + <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either +<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to +continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check +<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if +needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default +username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4664f200 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakboot" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">הגדרת אתחול המערכת</title> + + <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" align="center" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is +slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition +(ESP).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot--boot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure the +boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot, +etc.)</para> + + <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled "Set up +boot system".</para> + + <warning> + <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing +some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para> + </warning> + + <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if +using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, +Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question +of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the +<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you +are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any +modification can prevent your machine from booting.</para> + + <para>In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is +installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common +to all operating systems installed.</para> + + <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set +the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in +seconds. During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available +operating systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is +made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para> + + <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is +possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and +password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change +settings. The username is "root" and the password is the one chosen here.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para> + + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the +power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was +the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI +compatible.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para> + + <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for +multicore processors.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual +processor and enable SMP.</para> + </note> + + <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local +APIC:</guibutton></para> + + <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two +components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O +APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses +to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful +for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC +system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message +"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local +APIC.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot +loader you chose.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:</para> + + <para>In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot +time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu +entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you +click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> +buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or +to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be +able to use these tools.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want +to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For +example: Mageia3.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches +the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the +kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this +entry by default.</para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> +file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref +linkend="draknetprofile"/>, in the drop-down lists.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in +Legacy mode and UEFI mode):</para> + + <para>In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> +displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default +one.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them +to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box +<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel></para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable +Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not +touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable +unless chain loaded from another OS.</para> + </warning> + + <para>To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub +Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..671b7bbc --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakbug" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug-ti1">Mageia Bug Report Tool</title><subtitle>drakbug</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakbug-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" + fileref="drakbug.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Usually, this tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug</emphasis>.</para></footnote> starts automatically +when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing +a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the +information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report.</para> + + <para>If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, +then please read <link +xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly">How to +report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the "Report" button.</para> + + <para>In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message +that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to +that existing report that you saw the bug, too.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..832c157b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakbug_report.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="drakbug_report" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug_report-ti1">Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports</title><subtitle>drakbug_report</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + +<para>It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by +doing <emphasis role="bold">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, +but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be +several GBs large.</para> +<note><para>The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing +the unneeded parts.</para></note> + <para>This command collects the following information on your system:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> lspci</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pci_devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> dmidecode</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fdisk</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> scsi</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /sys/bus/scsi/devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lsmod</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cmdline</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pcmcia: stab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> usb</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> partitions</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cpuinfo</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> syslog</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> Xorg.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> monitor_full_edid</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> stage1.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> ddebug.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> install.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fstab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lilo.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: menu.lst</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: install.sh</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: device.map</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> xorg.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> urpmi.cfg</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.preload</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> sysconfig/i18n</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/iomem</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/ioport</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> mageia version</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> rpm -qa</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> df</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + + <note><para>At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's +output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch +to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as +root) <emphasis role="bold"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If +you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000 +lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role="bold">journalctl -a | tail +-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>.</para></note> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c133162 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakclock.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakclock"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">ניהול תאריך ושעה</title> + + <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the tab System +in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and +time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a +right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para> + + <para>It's a very simple tool.</para> + + <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On +the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on +the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month +(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or +2012). Select the day by clicking on its number.</para> + + <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time +Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on +time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time +Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para> + + <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's +useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, +minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows +to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see +your desktop environment settings for that.</para> + + <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the +<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the +nearest town.</para> + + <note> + <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they +will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation +settings.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aed9d960 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect--del.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">הסרת חיבור</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> + <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then +click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> + <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted +successfully.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e0cf591 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconnect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,808 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakconnect"> + <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled & Faudel whilst editing this document."> + <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">הגדרת מנשק רשת חדש (LAN, ISDN, ADSL ...)</title> + + <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure much of +local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from +your access provider or your network administrator.</para> + + <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware +and provider you have.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>הגדרה ידנית</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS +servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no +HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic ADSL would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Cable modem connection</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>כלום</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name +and password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>הגדרה ידנית</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers +to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME +is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic connection would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new DSL connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>פרוטוקול הגדרת מארח באופן דינמי (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>הגדרה ידנית של TCP/IP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP מעל תשתית Ethernet (PPPoE)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>פרוטוקול ערוץ נקודה לנקודה (PPTP)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>הגדרות גישה</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>שם משתמש (כניסה לחשבון)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new ISDN connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>מודם ISDN חיצוני</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and +manufacturer. Select your card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave +you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>שם התחברות</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>מספר טלפון</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שם משתמש</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שיטת אימות</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or +manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by +automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to +put:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>שם מתחם</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>First and second DNS Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you +are sure that your provider is configured to accept it.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic +or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the +IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for +Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper +only if the other configuration methods did not work.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that +the card has detected.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Operating mode:</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>מנוהל</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To access to an existing access point (the most frequent).</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Ad-Hoc</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To configure direct connection between computers.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured.</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>WPA/WPA2</term> + + <listitem> + <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>WEP</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption method.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>מפתח הצפנה</para> + + <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a +manual IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are +declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is +specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The +Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all +connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>הגדרה ידנית</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, +before the period.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Provide access settings</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>שם נקודת גישה (Access Point)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שם משתמש (כניסה לחשבון)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>בחירה ידנית</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package +<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider +gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>PAP/CHAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>מבוסס תסריט (סקריפט)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>מבוסס-מסוף</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>CHAP</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakconnect-end"> + <title>Ending the configuration</title> + + <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow +access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch +automatically between access point according to the signal strength.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Metric (10 by default)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>MTU</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>חיבור "חם" לרשת</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>אפשור tunnel מ-IPv6 ל-IPv4</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start +immediately or not.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fb92a0d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakconsole.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakconsole"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">פתיחת מסוף כמנהל המערכת</title> + + <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives you access to a console +which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more +information about that.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..092264d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakdisk.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakdisk"> + + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">ניהול מחיצות הכונן</title> + + <subtitle>drakdisk or diskdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny +error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a +partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll +see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on +<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para> + </warning> + + <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you +want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your +preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, +resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a +partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear +all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete +disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a +partition.</para> + + + + <!-- 2015-07-06 Note added by Lebarhon --> +<note> + <para>If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called "EFI System +Partition" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it contains +all your different operating systems bootloaders.</para> + </note> + + <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot +choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition +must be unmounted first.</para> + + <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para> + + <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to +delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button +<guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is +selected</para> + + <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> +gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be +seen in the screenshot below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67ec61ae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakedm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakedm"> + <info> + + <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC . 2017-04-10 simonnzg has looked and seems OK--> +<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">הגדרת מנהל ההפעלה</title> + <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png" align="center" xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para xml:id="drakedm-pa1" revision="1">Here<footnote><para xml:id="drakedm-pa3" revision="1">You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> you can choose which display +manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available +on your system will be shown.</para> + <para xml:id="drakedm-pa2" revision="1">Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look +different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM +is a lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e5fd686 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfirewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">הגדרת חומת־האש האישית שלך</title> + + <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the Security +tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal +firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system +security, permissions and audit".</para> + + <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming +connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the +first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection +attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - +<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable +the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para> + + <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field +<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these +examples :</para> + + <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para> + + <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para> + + <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is +checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) +it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even +recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para> + </note> + + <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature +allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box +<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second +box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure +somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards +corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot +below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be +warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para> + + <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the +Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary +packages are downloaded.</para> + + <tip> + <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & +Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para> + </tip> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f5604b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakfont.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakfont"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">ניהול, הוספה והסרת גופנים. ייבוא גופני חלונות (שם רשום)</title> + + <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It +allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen +above shows:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>a preview of the selected font.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some buttons explained here later.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis></para> + + <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You +must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able +to use the fonts.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">הסרה:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be +careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the +documents that use them.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">ייבוא:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The +supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the +<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis +role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the +fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when +done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para> + + <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont +main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f1bce2a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakguard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakguard"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">בקרת הורים</title> + + <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת <emphasis +role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> כמשתמש על (root).</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental +Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the +drakguard package (not installed by default).</para> + + <section> + <title>הצגה</title> + + <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to +restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three +useful capabilities:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by +controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can +only execute what you accept them to execute.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through +blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the +website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental +control blocker DansGuardian.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>הגדרת בקרת הורים</title> + + <para><warning> + <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, +Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on +your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel +feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named +users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by +an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this +prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will +then suggest you reboot.</para> + </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental +control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab +is opened.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the +websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all +the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para> + + <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have +their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the +right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are +not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an +user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to +remove him/her from the allowed users.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed +with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and +<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time +window.</para> + + <section> + <title>לשונית רשימת הדחייה/ההתרה</title> + + <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Block Programs Tab</title> + + <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to +restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the +applications you wish to block.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand +side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..314cfd85 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakgw.xml @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">שיתוף הקישור לאינטרנט עם מחשבים אחרים ברשת מקומית</title> + + <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakgw-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-principles"> + <title>עקרונות</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../drakgw-net.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a +computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local +network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to +other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the +gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card +must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to +the Internet (2).</para> + + <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are +set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard"> + <title>אשף שער הגישה</title> + + <para>The wizard<footnote> + <para>ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה על ידי הקלדת <emphasis +role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> כמשתמש על (root).</para> + </footnote> offers successive steps +which are shown below:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this +and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard +automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that +what is proposed is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes +one, check that this is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask +and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual +configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to +specify the address of a DNS server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure +it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, +with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the +proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to +printers and to share them.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-configure"> + <title>Configure the client</title> + + <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to +specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address +automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting +to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is +using.</para> + + <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular +specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the +gateway.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-stop"> + <title>Stop connection sharing</title> + + <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch +the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the +sharing.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e708636 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakhosts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">הגדרת מארחים</title> + + <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed +IP-addresses, this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to +specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name +instead of the IP-address.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para> + + <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window +to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an +alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para> + + <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the +same window.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2eed030c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakinvictus.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">הגדרות מתקדמות למנשקי הרשת וחומת־האש</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac4f21e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetcenter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="draknetcenter"> + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 +Write some text means i can't do it :( +What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything. +--> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">מרכז הרשת</title> + <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is found under the Network +& Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para> + <para/> + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks +configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, +etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending +on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its +settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a +network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, +ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para> + <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the +first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless +networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types, +the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not +connected.</para> + <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected +networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal +strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and +the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then +either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> +or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network +to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings +window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption +key in particular).</para> + <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>The Monitor button</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the +PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is +available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray +-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para> + <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the +local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which +gives details about connection status.</para> + <note> + <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic +accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para> + </note> + </section> + <section> + <title>The Configure button</title> + <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network +creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> +<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual +configuration may give better results.</para> + <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks +like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the +<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are +available from your providers website.</para> + <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count +the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in +the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may +have to reconnect to the network.</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network +Manager:</emphasis></para> + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para> + <para>Only the items not already seen above are explained.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para> + <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access +point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected. Select +<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select +<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the +access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para> + <para>If it is a private network, you need to know these settings.</para> + <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a +passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA +personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used +in private networks.</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para> + <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access +point while remaining connected to the network.</para> + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>The Advanced Settings button</title> + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edb669ef --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknetprofile.xml @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook' + xmlns:ns5='http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML' + xmlns:ns4='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' + xmlns:ns3='http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml' + xmlns:ns2='http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink' + xmlns:ns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook' + xml:id='draknetprofile' version='5.0'> + + <info> + <title xml:id='draknetprofile-ti1'>ניהול פרופילי רשת שונים</title> + <subtitle>Draknetprofile</subtitle> + </info> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix +set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a +desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between +various network environments: having the system run in different network +environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given +network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each +time the network environment changes.</para> + + <section> + <title>פרופילים</title> + + <para>Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a +standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>"network +profile"</emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, +defined for a specific network environment. Each network profile has a +<emphasis role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes +out of system generation has the name <emphasis>"default"</emphasis>; when a +new profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all +already existing profile names.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Draknetprofile</title> + + <para>Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center +(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing +profiles. This GUI allows to + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the +"current profile",</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>create a new, additional profile,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>delete a profile from the list of defined profiles.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Running Draknetprofile</title> + + <section> + <title>Defining profiles, profile switching</title> + + <para>Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its +users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, +launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im1' + fileref='./draknetprofile_mcc.png' format='PNG' align='center' + revision='1'/> + </imageobject> + <caption> + <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & +Internet tab</emphasis></para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <orderedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>select the "Network & Internet" tab,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>hit "Manage different network profiles" in the "Personalize and Secure your +network" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1).</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a +terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when +standard-output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - +for instance for debugging). Simply type:</para> + + <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'> + <tgroup cols='1'> + <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?> + <tbody> + <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?> + <entry><literal> draknetprofile </literal></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + + <para>After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im2' + fileref='./draknetprofile_main.png' format='PNG' + align='center' revision='1'/> + </imageobject> + <caption> + <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of +Draknetprofile</emphasis></para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently +defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>"Activate" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as +the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"New" ... create a new profile;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Delete" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Quit" ... exit from Draknetprofile.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Before hitting the "Activate" or the "Delete" button, you have to select a +profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the +target profile.</para> + + <para>Hitting the "New" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can type +the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different from +any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise copy +of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the current +profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties (modify the +automatically created configuration) in a second, independent action:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>exit from Draknetprofile (hit the "Quit" button),</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>back in the "Network & Internet" tab, you select the tab "Set up a new +network interface (...)" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1),</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are +similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during +system generation - as documented in the <link +linkend='drakconnect-ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the "Advanced" button +to make it visible. It should display the list of names of Draknetprofile +<emphasis role='bold'>"modules"</emphasis> (such as "network", "firewall", +"urpmi"), each with a check-button next to the name; these check-buttons +determine whether the properties controlled by that module are included into +the profile or not.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Using a system that has more than one profile</title> + + <para>In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user +interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the +bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you +will get a message like</para> + + <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'> + <tgroup cols='1'> + <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?> + <tbody> + <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?> + <entry><literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) +roaming* </literal></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + + <para>Type 1 or 2 to select the "default", respectively the "roaming" profile, or +carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk (the +profile that was active when the system had been shut down).</para> + + <para>Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens +that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a +profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This +problem is under investigation.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile</title> + + <para>The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory +<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names +like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file +<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> . + </para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..192eb7c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draknfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">שיתוף כוננים וספריות בעזרת NFS</title> + + <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Prerequisites</title> + + <para>When the wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is launched for the +first time, it may display the following message:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Main window</title> + + <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list +is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a +configuration tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>שינוי מובאה</title> + + <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched +with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are +available.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>NFS Directory</title> + + <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The +<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose +it.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>גישת מארח</title> + + <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared +directory.</para> + + <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para> + + <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name +recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para> + + <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para> + + <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard +characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the +domain cs.foo.edu.</para> + + <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all +hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either +`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>מיפוי זהוי משתמש</title> + + <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid +0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client +cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on +the server itself.</para> + + <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root +squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients +(no_root_squash).</para> + + <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids +to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP +directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID +mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para> + + <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of +the anonymous account.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>הגדרות מתקדמות</title> + + <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests +originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option +is on by default.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read +and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any +request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by +using this option.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from +violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made +by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para> + + <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can +help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See +exports(5) man page for more details.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>So far the list has at least one entry.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc7487cf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakproxy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakproxy" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">שרת מתווך (Proxy)</title> + + <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakproxy.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use +this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> to configure it. Your net +administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify +some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para> + + <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a +proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as +an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control their complexity.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f335fa3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakrpm-edit-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Configure Media</title> + + <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections --> +<!--2013-10-22 marja - improved wording, thanks to Aragorn :-) + - adjusted "Add" part to changed behaviour of this tool + (no longer a choice to only add "update sources" is + given) --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><important> + <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as +repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources +to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button +below).</para> + </important> <note> + <para>If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a +USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media +used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new +packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the +media type CD-Rom).</para> + </note> <note> + <para>Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called +i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether +your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They +don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both +the i586 and the x86_64 media.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title> + + <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with +some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para> + + <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only +media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, +this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root +and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis></para> + + <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead> + + <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release +versions contain at least:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available +supported by Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which +are not free</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might +be patent claims in some countries.</para> + + <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this +version of Mageia was released.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release +due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled, +even with a very slow internet connection.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions +backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests +of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the +corrections.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the right</title> + + <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para> + + <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to +remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since +all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and +proxy).</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories +contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button +adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that +you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a +specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from +the drop-down "File" menu.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list +in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same +release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will +be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para> + + <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and +click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's +too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the +actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them +out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose +between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the +<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by +clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very +close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available +mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para> + + <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that +isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart +name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to +the medium type)</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para> + + <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always +or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the +download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-, +update only, always or never).</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para> + + <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate +the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the +window that appear, select a medium and then click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click +on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para> + + <para><warning> + <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para> + </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para> + + <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it +here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if +necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>For more information about configuring the media, see <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management">the Mageia Wiki +page</link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..444986d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksambashare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksambashare" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title> + + <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare.png" format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some +resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure +the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is +also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the +resources of the Samba server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Preparation</title> + + <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP +address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with +<xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the +station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The +firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title> + + <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis +role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> checks if +needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not +yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare0.png" xml:id="draksambashare0-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already +selected.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare1.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the +access to the shared resources.</para> + + <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on +the network.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare2.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the +resource</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for +each share</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP +address or host name.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be +described in the Windows workstations.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im4" align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im5" align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the +configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in +<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare6.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im6" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller" +option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or +not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same +as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and +group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized +account repository is shared between (security) controllers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Declare a directory to share</title> + + <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im7" fileref="draksambashare15.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the +<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether +the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share +name can not be modified.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare16.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im8" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para> + + <formalpara> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Configure</title> + + <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </formalpara> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Printers share</title> + + <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Samba users</title> + + <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared +resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref +linkend="userdrake"/><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecec7b56 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksec.xml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="draksec"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">הגדרת אימות לכלים של Mageia</title> + + <subtitle>draksec</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec0.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks +usually done by the administrator.</para> + + <para>Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksec.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in +the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a +drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the +same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ae20c91 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksnapshot-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">תמונות מערכת</title> + <subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center" + format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is available in MCC's +<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration +tools</guilabel> section.</para> + <para>When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message +about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to +proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed.</para> + + <para>Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the +<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable +Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, +<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>.</para> + <para>If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to +the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and +files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the +<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from +the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> be +included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are +done.</para> + <para>Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the +<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted +USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis +role="bold">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>. + </para> + <para>Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a51c647 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/draksound.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">הגדרות קול</title> + <subtitle>draksound</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and +troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you +change the sound card.</para> + <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound +inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting +sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio +volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para> + <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it +enabled.</para> + <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It +is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para> + <para>The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with +fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this +before asking the community for help.</para> + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an +obvious button.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksound1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c976c872 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">הגדרת אל־פסק למעקב אחר צריכת החשמל</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b89366fb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakvpn.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakvpn"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title> + + <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure secure +access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local +workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the +configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is +already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the +network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>הגדרות</title> + + <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which +protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para> + + <para>Then give your connection a name.</para> + + <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For Cisco VPN</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the +first time the tool is used.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the files that you received +from the network administrator.</para> + + <para>Advanced parameters:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN +connection.</para> + + <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network +connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect +to this VPN.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..adc1026c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_apache2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up a web +server. + </para> + <section> + <title>מהו שרת רשת?</title> + <para> + Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be +accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2</title> + <para> + Welcome to the web server wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>מבוא</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server User Module</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows users to create their own sites. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User web directory name</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will +display it. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Document Root</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>סיכום</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>סיום</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e687f04 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_bind.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">הגדרת DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47c20571 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">הגדרת DHCP</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><note> + <para>This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net +interfaces</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should +be installed before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is DHCP?</title> + + <para>The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a +standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically +configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet +communication. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp</title> + + <para>Welcome to the DHCP server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting Adaptor</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for +which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select IP range</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want +the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to +some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>סיכום</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im5" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hold on...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and +change things around.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hours later...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from +<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and +adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>hname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dns</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>net</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ip</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>mask</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng1</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng2</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>gateway</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>tftpserverip</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dhcpd_interface</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Also modifying Webmin configuration file +<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dhcpd</code> מופעל מחדש.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..674fe393 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_ntp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">הגדרת זמן</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-10-25 Lebarhon - 3 screenshots ready to be added when it is possible --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> purpose is to set the time of +your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by +default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base +packages.</para> + + <section> + <title>Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para>After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three +time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice +because this server always points to available time servers.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp2.png"> + <info> +<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/></info> + </imagedata> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you +arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it +using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, +click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It +may take a while and you finally get this screen below:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool</para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para>This tool executes the following steps:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to +<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of +servers;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server +name;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and +<code>ntpd</code> services;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4ae9d18 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_proftpd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">הגדרת FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>FTP</acronym> server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?</title> + <para> + File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network +protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a +<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>מבוא</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Information</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email +complaints too and whether to allow root login access. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> +(File eXchange Protocol) + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>סיכום</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>סיום</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c69d928a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_squid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">הגדרת שרת מתווך</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed +before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is a proxy server?</title> + + <para>A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts +as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid</title> + + <para>Welcome to the proxy server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting the proxy port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Set Memory and Disk Usage</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select Network Access Control</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set visibility to local network or world, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Grant Network Access</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Use Upper Level Proxy Server?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Upper Level Proxy URL and Port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>סיכום</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Start during boot?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im10"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>סיום</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im11"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package squid if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in +<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from +<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_dir</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>localnet</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>cache_mem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>http_port</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_peer</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>visible_hostname</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>squid.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c260558 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakwizard_sshd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">הגדרת תוכנת הרקע OpenSSH</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?</title> + <para> + Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data +communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and +other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, +via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client +(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, +respectively). (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the Open SSH wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Select Type of Configure Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or +<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>אפשרויות כלליות</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard +<acronym>SSH</acronym> port. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Authentication Methods</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, +then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Logging</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose logging facility and level of output, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Compression and Forwarding</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>סיכום</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im9" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>סיום</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im10" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..682df18c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/drakxservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="drakxservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">ניהול שירותי המערכת על ידי הפעלתם או ניטרולם</title> + <subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" fileref="drakxservices.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..767e97e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/harddrake2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="harddrake2" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title> + + <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="harddrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives a general view of the +hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to +look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command +<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in +<code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para> + + <section> + <title>The window</title> + + <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para> + + <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are +grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a +category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para> + + <para>The right column displays information about the selected device. The +<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information +about the content of the fields.</para> + + <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are +available at the bottom of the right column:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to +parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must +used by experts only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can +configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The menu</title> + + <para><bridgehead>אפשרויות</bridgehead></para> + + <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to +enable automatic detection:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>modem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Jaz devices</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Zip parallel devices</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check +the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will +be operational the next time this tool is started.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23fa6c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/keyboarddrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title> + + + + <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC --> +<subtitle>מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake)</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>מבוא</title> + + <para>כלי מקלדרייק (keyboarddrake)<footnote> + <para>ניתן להפעיל את הכלי הזה דרך שורת הפקודה, באמצעות כתיבת <emphasis +role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis>as root.</para> + </footnote> עוזר לך +בהגדרת הפריסה הבסיסית למקלדת שבה ברצונך להשתמש ב־Mageia. הוא משפיע על פריסת +המקלדת עבור כל המשתמשים במערכת. ניתן למצוא אותו במקטע החומרה של מרכז הבקרה +של Mageia בשם "הגדרת עכבר ומקלדת".</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>פריסת מקלדת</title> + + <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed +in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each +layout should be used for.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>סוג מקלדת</title> + + <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are +unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f2de83b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/localedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="localedrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">ניהול התאמה למיקום של המערכת שלך</title> + + <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="localedrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="localedrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root. + </para></footnote> can be found in the System +section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for +your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your +language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate +compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8).</para> + + <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected +language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to +countries not listed.</para> + + <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para> + +<section xml:id="input_method"> + <info> + <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Input method</title> + </info> + <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an +input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input +methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, +Korean, etc).</para> + <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so +users should not need to configure it manually.</para> + <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions +and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another +part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para> +</section> + +</section> + diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ca3104c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/logdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">עיון וחיפוש ברישומי מערכת</title> + + <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system +logs</guilabel>".</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>To do a search in the logs</title> + + <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis +role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to +<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field +<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) +to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is +possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis +role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the +month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected +day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button +to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the +file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by +clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para> + + <note> + <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia +configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are +updated each time a configuration is modified.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>To configure a mail alert</title> + + <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and +the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured +address.</para> + + <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail +Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> +Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the +running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to +look watch. (See screenshot above).</para> + + <para>The following services can be watched :</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>שירות Webmin</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שרת הדוא"ל של Postfix</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שרת FTP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שרת WWW של APACHI</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שרת SSH</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שרת סמבה</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>שירות Xinetd </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider +unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows +the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone +out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value +to 3 times the number of processors.</para> + + <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the +person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local +or on the Internet).</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e2d554d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lsnetdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="lsnetdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lsnetdrake-ti1">Display Available NFS And SMB Shares</title> + <subtitle>lsnetdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lsnetdrake</emphasis>. + </para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Documentation +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4585125 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/lspcidrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="lspcidrake"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lspcidrake-ti1">Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information</title> + + <subtitle>lspcidrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lspcidrake</emphasis>.</para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, +PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst +packages to work.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it +is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:</para> + + <para>Information about the graphic card;</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command></para> + + <para>Information about the network</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command></para> + + <para>-i to ignore case distinctions.</para> + + <para>In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for +lspcidrake and the -i option for grep.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is +called <emphasis role="bold">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7bea08d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="mcc-boot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">אתחול</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-boot.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot +steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות שלבי האתחול</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakautologin"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakautologin.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76c0a07c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="mcc-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">חומרה</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-hardware.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your +hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>ניהול חומרה</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure +hardware</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות גרפיקה</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות עכבר ומקלדת</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות הדפסה וסריקה</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), +the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>שונות</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37b30525 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info> + + + <para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to +choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was +installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be +selected in the big right panel.</para> + + <para>The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related +tools.</para> + +<para>The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in +any of the MCC tabs.</para> + + <para>The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool +screens.</para> + + <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on +the "Search" tab in the left column.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bfa4f62d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-localdisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">כוננים מקומיים</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your +local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>כוננים מקומיים</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include> + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..771e263b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-network.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">רשת ואינטרנט</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link +below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>הגדרות התקני רשת</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>הגדרות פרטיות ואבטחה ברשת</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>שונות</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ba56a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networkservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="mcc-networkservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">שרותי רשת</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-networkservices.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if +the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose +between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or +on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>שרותי רשת</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para> + </listitem> + + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c2cb525 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-networksharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">שיתופי רשת</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and +directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות שיתופי וינדוז</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and +directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות שיתופי NFS</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות שיתופי WebDAV</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dca3b430 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-security.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="mcc-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">הגדרות אבטחה</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-security.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a +link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>הגדרות אבטחה</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions +and audit</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9d1d6ee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-sharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="mcc-sharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">שיתוף</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-sharing.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only +visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can +choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link +below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>שיתוף</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e9e19f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mcc-system.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xml:id="mcc-system" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">מערכת</title> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="mcc-system-im1" fileref="mcc-system.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration +tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>הגדרות שירותי המערכת</title> + <listitem> + <para> <xref linkend="drakauth"/> </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfont"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>התאמה למקום</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakclock"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="localedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>כלי ניהול</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="logdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="userdrake"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9dc9f6b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mgaapplet-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">הגדרת תדירות העדכונים</title> + + <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / +Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for +updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The +check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is +out.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ef5bc2b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/mousedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">הגדרת התקן הצבעה (עכבר, לוח מגע)</title> + + <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by +Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para> + + <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse +and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any +PS/2 & USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is +immediately taken into account.</para> + + </section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8306b558 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/msecgui.xml @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="msecgui"> + <info> + <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title> + + <subtitle>msecgui</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- written by Lebarhon 2014/01/03 To be checked--> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" fileref="msecgui.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>הצגה</title> + + <para>msecgui<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is a graphic user interface for +msec that allows to configure your system security according to two +approaches:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to +make it more secure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn +you if something seems dangerous.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a +set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or +enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your +own customised security levels.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Overview tab</title> + + <para>See the screenshot above</para> + + <para>The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a +button on the right side to configure them:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>msec itself with some information:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>enabled or not</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the configured Base security level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report +and another button to execute the checks just now.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Security settings tab</title> + + <para>A click on the second tab or on the Security +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown +below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Basic security tab</title> + + <para role="underline"> + <emphasis role="underline">Security levels:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab +allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then +in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The +following levels are available:</para> + + <orderedlist numeration="arabic"> + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you +do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on +your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or +constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only +if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system +vulnerable to attack.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">standard</emphasis>. This is the default +configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It +constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which +detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory +permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec +versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when +you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts +system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to +the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and +5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, +such as the <emphasis role="bold">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis +role="bold">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis +role="bold">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure +system security according to the most common use cases.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last two levels called <emphasis role="bold">audit_daily </emphasis> and +<emphasis role="bold">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security levels +but rather tools for periodic checks only.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>These levels are saved in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></filename>. You can define +your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called +<filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed into the folder +<filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for +power users which require a customised or more secure system configuration.</para> + + <caution> + <para>Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default +level settings.</para> + </caution> + + <para> + <emphasis role="underline">Security alerts:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email +to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent +by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You +can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail +and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive +the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to +enable it.</para> + + <important> + <para>It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to +immediately inform the security administrator of possible security +problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs +files available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename></para></important> + + <para><emphasis role="underline">Security options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer +security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change +any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains +the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done +to the options.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>System security tab</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a +description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side +column.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see +screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the +actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be +selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the +choice.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui11.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <caution> + <para>Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration +using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you +have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before +saving them.</para> + </caution> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui10.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Network security</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Periodic checks tab</title> + + <para>Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of +security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous.</para> + + <para>This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency +if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is +checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Exceptions tab</title> + + <para>Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In +these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab +allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert +messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot +below shows four exceptions.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> +button</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called +<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the +<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is +obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the +<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> +tab or modify it with a double clicK.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>הרשאות</title> + <para>This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and +enforcement.</para> + <para>Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, +secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security +level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them +into specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed +into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is +intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is +also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission +you want. Current configuration is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the +list of all the modifications done to the permissions.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You +can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the +owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a +given rule:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the +defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message +if not, but does not change anything.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the +permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the +permissions.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <important><para>For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly.</para></important><para>To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button +and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in +the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do +not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the +menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed +the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. </para> + <note><para>It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the +configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>. + </para></note> + <caution><para>Changes in the <emphasis role="bold">Permission tab</emphasis> (or directly +in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic +check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role="bold">Periodic +checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately into +account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can +use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be +changed by msecperms.</para></caution> + <caution><para>Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file +manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked +in the <emphasis role="bold">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will write +the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of +the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>.</para></caution> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f08bc5f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/otherMageiaTools.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="otherMageiaTools"> + <info> + <title xml:id="otherMageiaTools-ti1">Other Mageia Tools</title> + </info> + + <para>There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia +Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the +next pages.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug_report"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lsnetdrake"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lspcidrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>And more tools?</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakbug.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakbug_report.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lsnetdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lspcidrake.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64d2fe59 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/rpmdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags--> +<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove Software)</title> + + <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" align="center" fileref="rpmdrake.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + + <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a +program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the +graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online +package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official +servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages +available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only +certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by +default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed +packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries +of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names +included in the packages.</para> + + <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref +linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <important> + <para>During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for +the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake +will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window +: <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the above message annoys you +and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit, +it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories +thanks to <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <para>Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more +packages, and allow to update your installed packages.</para> + </important> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The main parts of the screen</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first +time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical +interface. You can display either all the packages and all their +dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, +updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia.</para> + + <warning> + <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who +probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading +this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge +of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All".</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state filter:</emphasis> +</firstterm></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the +packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and +not installed.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their +summaries, through their complete description or through the files included +in the packages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword +for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and +"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box +.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and +sub categories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete +description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It +can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the +package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The status column</title> + + <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by +category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A +list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium +is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is +installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or +uncheck the box before the package name and click on +<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><table> + <title/> + + <tgroup align="left" cols="2"> + <colspec align="center"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry align="center">סמל</entry> + + <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table></para> + + <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status +icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking +on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange +with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when +clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The dependencies</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They +are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an +information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected +dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It +may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed +library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a +button to get more information and another button to choose which package to +install.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d736d36a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/scannerdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,259 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="scannerdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">הגדרת סורק</title> + <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <section xml:id="scannerinstallation"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">התקנה</title> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure a +single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It +also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a +remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para> + + <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following +message:</para> + + <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para> + + <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install +<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet +installed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see +the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, +<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner +sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref +linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para> + + + <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its +cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new +scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a +scanner manually</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the +list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click +<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para> + + <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link +xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE: +Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> + </note> + +<figure xml:id="choosescannerport"> +<info> + <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title> + </info> <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></figure> + + <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available +ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that +case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para> + + <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen +similar to the one below.</para> +<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref +linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="scannersharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be +accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also +decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on +this machine.</para> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or +deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on +this computer.</para> + + <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted +from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote +machines.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool +offers to do it.</para> + + <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive +"net"</para> + + <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and +<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para> + </section> + +<section xml:id="scannerspecifics"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title> + </info> + + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Hewlett-Packard</para> + + <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> +(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow +you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device +Manager</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Epson</para> + + <para>Drivers are available from <link +xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +page</link>. When indicated, you must install the +<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict +with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be +ignored.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</section> + +<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title> + </info> + + <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref +linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra +steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para> + +<itemizedlist> + + <listitem> +<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded +each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, +after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the +firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you +downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para> + When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at +each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para> +</listitem> + + <listitem> +<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the +<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para> + </listitem> + +<listitem> +<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know +what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> +</listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a8737a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/software-management.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" +xml:id="software-management"> + <info> + <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">ניהול תוכנה</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="software-management.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software +management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist><title>ניהול תוכנה</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media +sources for install and update</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..533f6a33 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/system-config-printer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="system-config-printer"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 --> +<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) + Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13--> +<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a printer</title> + + <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="introduction"> + <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">מבוא</title> + + <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link +ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration +interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia +offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer +which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu +and openSUSE.</para> + + <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the +installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way.</para> + + <para>Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> +section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure +printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked +for.</para> + </footnote>.</para> + + <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>task-printing-server</para> + + <para>task-printing-hp</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of +dependencies are needed.</para> + + <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to +detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a +printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a +printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window +will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="automatic"> + <title>Automatically detected printer</title> + + <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the +name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click +"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be +automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known +drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the +next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="non_automatic"> + <title>No automatically detected printer</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window +to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following +options.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Select printer from database</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>provide PPD file</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>search for a driver to download</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer +first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one +driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have +encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one +which know to work.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="terminate"> + <title>Complete the installation process</title> + + <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will +allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is +the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of +available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After +this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available +printers.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printer"> + <title>Network printer</title> + + <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or +wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to +another workstation that serves as printserver.</para> + + <note> + <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed +IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same +as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed +one.</para> + </note> + + <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or +printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a +configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label +on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a +Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it +as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters +after "HWaddr".</para> + + <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to +your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, +you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find +Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu +and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it +says "host".</para> + + <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a +protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the +list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list.</para> + + <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find +which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols"> + <title>Network printing protocols</title> + + <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as +JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network +via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is +known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers +which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the +IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can +manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like +<emphasis>hp:/net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed +IP-adress is not required.</para> + + <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the +protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change +the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be +changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is +the same as above.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The other protocols are:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can +be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by +some ADSL-routers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, +but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be +defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but +with TLS secured protocol.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be +accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using LPD.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a +station running Windows or a SMB server and shared.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form +the URI:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Appsocket</para> + + <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para> + + <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + + <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para> + + <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Additional information can be found in the <link +ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS +documentation.</link></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="properties"> + <title>Device Properties</title> + + <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to +parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your +system, but you can specify a different one with the +<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, +another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters +of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | +<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title> + + <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by +inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para> + + <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="specificities"> + <title>Specifics</title> + + <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in +Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link +ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link> site to +check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package +is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, +redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report +the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this +tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer +works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other +up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para> + + <para><link +ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This +page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver +for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para> + + <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one +devices</emphasis></para> + + <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the +detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information +<link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>. The +tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the <guilabel>System</guilabel> +menu. Also view <link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link> +for the management of the printer.</para> + + <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner +features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't +allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this +case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the +picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, +open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory +card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para> + + <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link +ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link> for +the QPDL protocol.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link +ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data" +package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also +be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages +according to your architecture. </para> + + <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a +conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para> + + <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint +<link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here </link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3138eb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/transfugdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="he"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">יבוא מסמכים והגדרות מ־Windows</title> + + <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled +<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings +from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> +installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake +immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </warning> + + <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some +explanation about the tool and import options.</para> + + <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of +<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para> + + <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to +choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and +Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account +than yours own.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of +transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> +user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications +(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For +example, NVidia drivers in <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using +<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the +import purposes.</para> + </warning> + + <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import documents:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My +Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My +Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the +appropriate item in this window.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import bookmarks:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para> + + <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + + + <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE + <para> +With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para> +--> +<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the +<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7305f2e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/he/userdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="he" xml:id="userdrake"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">משתמשים וקבוצות</title> + + <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +"Manage users on system"</para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this +means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings +(ID, shell, ...)</para> + + <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in +the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the +<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para> + + <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para> + + <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the +entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything +or nothing as well!</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para> + + <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly +recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the +password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should +use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The +shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure +you entered what you intended to.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows +you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are +Bash, Dash and Sh.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if +checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new +user as the only member (this may be edited).</para> + + <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately +after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para> + + <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific +group ID.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para> + + <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given +for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. +Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary +accounts.</para> + + <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long +as the account is locked.</para> + + <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an +expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his +password periodically.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that +the user is a member of.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be +effective until his/her next login.</para> + </note> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group +name.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users +who are members of the group</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis +role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to +ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group +has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para> + + <warning> + <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para> + </warning> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para> + + <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to +refresh the display.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended +to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login +is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications +to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the +end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click +in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file |